Dw windsor exterior lighting catalogue issue 4 by Ribal Younes

folds

Contact numbers General Enquiries: T: 01992 474600 F: 01992 474601 E: info@dwwindsor.co.uk

DW Windsor Lighting Pindar Road, Hoddesdon Hertfordshire. EN11 0DX T: 01992 474600 F: 01992 474601 E: info@dwwindsor.co.uk

DW Windsor Limited is a member of DW Group Holdings Limited © DW Windsor 2012

DWW2012_Cover_OUTER_AW.indd 1

folds

Products at a glance

Dedicated product advice: E: answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

See pages 4 - 5 for a visual index of all our products

If you have a question about our products please contact us using our dedicated email address for an answer within twenty-four hours (Monday to Friday)

New products

Akord Bullet Akord Cone Anello LED Aventis Barosa Berkeley Braemar Camaro Cannon Capra Capra-Compact Capra-Mini Cassia LED Colada Colada LED Columns Corvus Cradle Crieff Dover DW400 Ely Eton Evora Evora LED Excel Forza Garda Hatﬁeld Henley Ifﬂey Knightsbridge Kona Lago Lancaster LED Light Engine Light Point Luca Lyra Malo LED Manhattan Mano LED Meridian Milano

Monaro Monaro LED II Monza Newport Nexus Pall Mall Petra Pharola Pharola-Max Pharola-Wall Polar Polar (bollard) Portea LED Portland Reno Renza LED Riga Rio Road Lantern Rona Sabre Salisbury Silka Silka-Max Solar & Wind Sorento Strand A & A Plus Strand B & C Stratum Tatra Tizona Toro Toronto Trebem Vaio LED Vector Vertica Vertica LED Warwick Waterford Westminster Windsor York

86 86 166 212 78 118 138 66 244 182 184 180 186 248 248 256 104 98 102 96 146 124 244 58 62 94 88 214 132 140 130 114 202 226 112 32 168 196 188 194 82 190 148 44

See pages 6 - 9 for some of our latest innovative products

52 54 192 136 240 116 176 228 230 200 98 242 172 118 198 174 240 80 144 238 252 136 232 236 152 74 120 122 92 210 250 150 84 224 160 242 206 204 134 138 116 110 134

Product index

Exterior Lighting | Issue 4

www.dwwindsor.com

Exterior Lighting Contemporary Classic Traditional Functional Solar & Wind Architectural LED Handrail Illuminated Bollards Floodlighting Columns & Brackets

Please open this ﬂap for our handy guide to specifying our products

www.dwwindsor.com 05/11/2012 11:59

Light Solutions

Light solutions Light shapes our perception of the world. As an international, award-winning designer and manufacturer of exterior lighting solutions and urban furniture, DW Windsor recognises that lighting specifiers require products which are both innovative and sustainable in their offering. Combining style and quality with high performance, we have led the way in creating lighting solutions designed to enhance the environment. From traditional to contemporary or bespoke, we offer considerable breadth and depth of product choice, backed by the strongest environmental credentials.

Milano LED Bankside, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

We strive to offer a comprehensive range of quality products and value-added services as standard.

Welcome to DW Windsor Outstanding quality & service, every time DW Windsor Light Solutions

Products at a Glance

NEW Products

In Recognition of our Commitment

How We Can Support You 12

Contemporary

Classic

Traditional

106

Functional

142

Architectural

158

Stratum

LED Light Engine

108

Road Lantern

144

Vaio LED Introduction

160

Illuminated LED Handrail

214

Milano Introduction Milano Curved Arms

Excel

Windsor

110

DW400

146

Vaio LED

164

Design Philosophy

216 218

Milano Straight Arms

Dover

Lancaster

112

Meridian

148

Anello LED

166

Garda LED Handrail

Monaro Introduction

Polar & Cradle

Knightsbridge

114

Toro

150

Light Point

168

Monaro LED II

100

Westminster & Pall Mall

116

Solar & Wind

152

Portea LED

172

Monaro

Technical Details (Optima Series)

How to Illuminate Areas 220 using Garda LED Handrail

118

Renza LED

104

120

Evora LED

Corvus

Strand

Lighting Powered by Nature

154

102

Portland & Berkeley

Evora Introduction

Crieff

Ely

124

156

Evora

Strand/Ely Technical

128

Stand-Alone & Grid Connected Systems

It’s always been our belief that lighting should be more than just functional illumination. After all, good lighting can help shape the character of an environment, by engaging and uplifting the people it touches.

We aim to deliver the best quality and service, on time, every time, for our customers. And for your customers, we try our utmost to provide lighting that will enrich the environments where they work and live.

That’s why we continually seek to work with our customers to look beyond pure aesthetics, sharing our knowledge and technical expertise to provide the right light, in the right place and controlled with the right systems.

Terry Dean | Managing Director

Illuminated Bollards 222

Floodlighting

246

Trebem

224

Colada LED

248

Lago

226

Colada

248

256 Columns, Brackets, Pedestals & Feeder Pillars Special Structures

258

Column Introduction

260

Standard Columns

262

Special Columns Painting Columns & Brackets

Pharola

228

Tizona

250

Pharola-Max

230

Sabre

252

Silka

232

Floodlighting Brackets

254

174

Silka-Max

236

Petra

176

Rona

238

Capra Introduction

178

Nexus & Riga

240

Capra-Mini

180

Polar & Vector

242

Columns Technical Details

272

Cannon & Eton

244

Raise & Lower Columns

274 276

270

Lighting Car Parks

302

Minimising Light Spill

304

Wildlife Considerations

306

Integrating Sphere

Camaro Introduction

Iffley

130

Capra

182

A Sure Test of Quality

Hatfield

132

Capra-Compact

184

White Light

Camaro Design Philosophy

Cassia LED

186

134

CosmoPolis

Camaro

York & Warwick

Salisbury & Newport

136

Lyra

188

Sorento Introduction

Column Enhancements: Banners, Festive Decorations, Baskets and CCTV

Mano LED

190

Pedestals

278

138

Control & Dim

Sorento

Braemar & Waterford

Monza

192

Column Brackets

279

140

LeafNut

Barosa

Henley

Finials

284

194

Diamond Optic®

Rio

Malo LED

Wall Brackets

286

196

LED Light Engine

Manhattan

Luca

Feeder Pillars

289

198

LX1 Luminance Optic

Toronto

Reno

EN 40 Column Standard

290

200

Uniqute Solutions

Akord Bullet

Pharola-Wall

202

Refurbishments & Replicas

Akord Cone

Kona

Forza

Vertica LED

204

Urban Furniture

Vertica

206

Tatra

210

Aventis

212

Traditional | 106

Functional | 142

Solar & Wind | 152

Architectural | 158

LED Handrail | 214

Bollards | 222

Floodlighting | 246

Columns | 256

Lighting Facades, Statues 296 and Monuments

266

Providing the Highest Performing Products

Classic | 90

294

298

Contemporary | 42

292

Lighting Pedestrian Crossings

Photometric Calculations Available Via DIALux

StreetWise

How-to Guides Lighting Landscapes, the Vertical and Using In-ground Luminaires

How to Guides | 292

Technical Information

308

CEN Code of Practice

310

WEEE Directive & Energy Related Products

312

Ingress Protection & Shock Resistance

313

Lamp Data

314

Glossary

316

Index

318

General Conditions of Trading

320

Technical Info | 308

Light Solutions

Contemporary

Classic

Products at a Glance

Architectural

Milano

Monaro LED II

Monaro

Evora LED

Evora

Camaro

Stratum

Excel

Dover

Polar

Vaio LED

Anello LED

Light Point

Portea LED

Renza LED

44 – 51

52 – 55

52 – 57

58 – 63

58 – 65

66 – 73

92 – 93

94 – 95

96 – 97

98 – 99

160 – 165

166 – 167

168 – 171

172 – 173

174 – 175

Sorento

Barosa

Rio

Manhattan

Toronto

Akord Cone

Cradle

Crieff

Corvus

Petra

Capra-Mini

Capra

Capra-Compact Cassia LED

Trebem

Lago

Pharola

Pharola-Max

Silka

74 – 77

78 – 79

80 – 81

82 – 83

84 – 85

86 – 87

98 – 99

102 – 103

104 – 105

176 – 177

178 – 181

178 – 183

178 – 185

186 – 187

224 – 225

226 – 227

228 – 229

230 – 231

232 – 235

Akord Bullet

Forza

Lyra

Mano LED

Monza

Malo LED

Luca

Silka-Max

Rona

Nexus & Riga

86 – 87

88 – 89

188 – 189

190 – 191

192 – 193

194 – 195

196 – 197

236 – 237

238 – 239

240 – 241

Polar & Vector

Cannon & Eton

242 – 243

244 – 245

Traditional

Functional

Reno

Pharola-Wall

Kona

Vertica LED

Vertica

198 – 199

200 – 201

202 – 203

204 – 205

206 – 207

Bollards

Floodlighting

Windsor

Lancaster

Knightsbridge Westminster

Pall Mall

Portland

Road Lantern

DW400

Meridian

Toro

Tatra

Aventis

Colada LED

Colada

Tizona

Sabre

110 – 111

112 – 113

114 – 115

116 – 117

118 – 119

144 – 145

146 – 147

148 – 149

150 – 151

210 – 211

212 – 213

248 – 249

250 – 251

252 – 253

116 – 117

Projection

Berkeley

Strand

Ely

Iffley

Hatfield

York

118 – 119

120 – 123

124 – 127

130 – 131

132 – 133

134 – 135

Solar & Wind

Illuminated LED Handrail

Columns, Brackets, Pedestals & Feeder Pillars Projection

Warwick

Salisbury

Newport

Braemar

Waterford

Henley

Lighting Powered by Nature

Garda

Columns

Brackets

Pedestals

Feeder Pillars

134 – 135

136 – 137

138 – 139

140 – 141

154 – 155

218 – 219

260 – 265

279 – 283

278

288 – 289

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

NEW Products

Camaro

Pages 152 – 157

Solar Wind

Rona

Pages 238 – 239

Forza

Pages 88 – 89

Pages 66 – 73

Evora LED

Pages 32 – 33 & 108 – 109

LED Light Engine

Pages 266 – 269

Special columns

Pages 62 – 63

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Pages 150 – 151

Pages 178 – 185

Pages 194 – 195

Malo LED

NEW Products

Toro

Pages 190 – 191

Capra-Compact

Mano LED

Pages 186 – 187

Capra

Capra-Mini

Cassia LED

Pages 224 – 225

Trebem

Pages 230 – 231

Pharola-Max

8 Light Solutions Light Solutions 9

NEW Products

Mano LED – Square

Mano LED – Circular

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

In Recognition of our Commitment

Sophisticated solutions to meet stringent regulations For over 35 years, DW Windsor has worked in parallel with the market, developing our products and services in line with changing expectations, raising standards and bringing our considerable experience and industry knowledge to bear. Known throughout the industry for the quality of our products and the high standards of service and support we offer our customers, we are also recognised for our ambitious new product development improvement programme. We have a reputation, particularly in public sector lighting, for outstanding quality and performance through innovation, attention to detail and customer focus. We offer a wide range of additional services to our customers including: special product design and manufacture, lighting scheme design and visualisation, project management, laboratory testing and refurbishment and replica. Pro-active in approach, our business is built on developing long term, trusting relationships. Working alongside our clients we help manage your project from start to finish, providing expert support and advice at all stages. Our many successes include: • Queen’s Award for Outstanding Export Achievement • Queen’s Award for Environmental Achievement • Royal Warrant

LUX 2011 Award for Urban Lighting using Garda LED Handrail

Essex Street Steps, London

DW Windsor products and services are accredited and audited to the highest possible industry standards, ensuring that we always deliver on our company ethos of Style with Performance. ISO Standards held: ISO is the International Organisation for Standardisation. DW Windsor were one of the first within the lighting industry to receive all three accreditations, giving customers, suppliers and employees a benchmark assurance that our operational standards and business processes are among the best in the industry.

ISO 9001

The International Standard for Quality Management Systems (QMS). ISO 9001:2008 ensures a systematic and consistent approach to the management of our business activities. DW Windsor is recognised, both within the UK and overseas, as a provider of quality, exterior lighting solutions. Our reputation is built on a commitment to quality, dedication to customer satisfaction, continuous improvement of both product and processes, outstanding levels of product performance and an innovative approach to research and development.

ISO 14001

OHSAS 18001

The International Standard for Environmental Management Systems.

The International Occupational Health and Safety Management Standard. Addressing health and safety (rather than product safety).

There are three fundamental requirements to achieve ISO 14401: prevention of pollution, compliance with legislation and continual improvement through an EMS (Energy Management System). As a UK manufacturer who continually strives to exceed our customers’ exacting carbon reduction commitments, the ISO 14001 accreditation for our Environmental Management System (EMS) is a particularly important milestone. Reducing our environmental impact is an on-going process. Our dedicated team continually look towards our next set of performance improvements including the yearly reduction of our landfill waste by 10 tonnes.

Lumicom

ROSPA

DW Windsor was privileged to receive The Royal Society for the Prevention of Accidents Gold Award for Occupational Health and Safety in May 2012. The extremely prestigious Gold award, is awarded to those organisations that demonstrate the most robust of health and safety management systems, leadership and workforce involvement.

As an environmentally aware manufacturer we subscribe to the Lumicom system to manage the collection and responsible disposal of end of life lighting equipment (see page 312).

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

How We Can Support You We offer a comprehensive, complimentary lighting design service to clients. Whether you require a detailed design from scratch, a quick calculation to check your own design, or even just an initial discussion of concepts, we have the capabilities to help you. Our experienced team is equipped to visit you at any time, before, during or after the design process to assist with establishing design parameters, requirements and time frames for your project. Our aim is to provide thorough, timely and professionally presented lighting design schemes to meet your targets and exceed your expectations.

Night-time 3D environment created using photometric data

Our in-house team of lighting designers use the latest software to undertake lighting designs including road, car park, area, sports, railway, architectural and accent lighting. This careful selection of software allows us to produce designs using customersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; drawings and to create visualisations including night-time 3D environments with accurate photometric data. The realism which can be achieved is impressive; so much so that it can often be difficult to distinguish reality from simulation.

St. Giles Hospital, Camberwell

Comprehensive scheme designs are produced in either hard copy or digital format. These can include a layout plot with results, a comprehensive report document, scheme visualisations, product information, general drawings and quotations. The aim is for the scheme design to include all information that may be required including an explanation of the requirements we have designed to, details of lamp specifications, luminaires and all other aspects relating to the project. We take pride in our openness and clarity regarding technical aspects of the design, with the emphasis on providing a high quality, high efficiency solution.

Sharing the Knowledge Our CPD seminars provide valuable insight and debate on key issues that continue to present challenges and opportunities to all of us involved in the lighting industry. We invest heavily in researching the areas that really matter and over the years we have built a significant knowledge base. The result of which is a range of seminars that aim to fulfil the ever changing needs of todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s lighting specifiers.

If you have a question about our products please contact our dedicated email address: answers@dwwindsor.co.uk, for an answer within twenty-four hours (Monday to Friday)

Check our website for an up-to-date list of available topics: dwwindsor.co.uk To request a seminar, email marketing@dwwindsor.co.uk or discuss with your Project Engineer.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Photometric Calculations Available Via DIALux

Providing the Highest Performing Products

With over 394,000 users worldwide and available in 26 languages, DIALux has fast become the industry standard lighting design software. DW Windsor is therefore working in partnership with DIALux to offer photometric data for our products via this design software package.

With a typical lifespan of 25 years, exterior luminaires are required to cope with a significant amount of punishment from the forces of nature. Throughout that time they must maintain their design integrity while consistently delivering on performance. Our products are the most important thing we have to say about ourselves – which is why we have an established new product development programme. With a strong track record in the development of high quality exterior lighting, we strive to anticipate future trends and provide solutions that exceed expectation and provide real value to our customers. Visualisations created using DIALux software

By providing data in this way we hope to assist you to make an informed product and performance choice, helping you to specify the right product for your project requirements. DIALux is suitable for interior or exterior calculations and visualisations. It provides readily available and up to date product photometry, with its “instant” update facility. Professional detailed lighting reports and visualisations can be created.

Visualisations created using DiaLUX software

For more detailed information or assistance in using DIALux contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600

It is free to use and can be downloaded from our website at: dwwindsor.com/dialux

Integrating Sphere

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

A Sure Test of Quality Integrating Sphere As part of our on-going commitment to providing high performing luminaires and in light of the significant evolution in LED technology, DW Windsor has invested in an integrating sphere for our well-equipped laboratory. With a diameter of three metres it will accommodate even the largest of our LED luminaires. A large sphere is necessary to measure large luminaires because the internal surface area of the sphere needs to be over fifty times the external surface area of the luminaire being measured. Without this relationship, the accuracy of the measurements may be questionable. Custom designed to our specification, we believe the sphere, which is calibrated with three ultimate reference lamps to traceable standards, thus more accurate than a traditional photometer, is one of the biggest and possibly the most accurate sphere in the country. We believe, therefore, that the Integrating Sphere is vital to our on-going ability to continue to design and develop high performance LED luminaires.

What is an Integrating Sphere? Measuring lumen output, an Integrating Sphere, also known as an Ulbricht sphere, is an optical tool consisting of a hollow spherical cavity which is both diffuse and highly reflective. Use of a spectroradiometer allows measurement of the colour spectrum including, colour temperature and colour rendering, allowing us to issue accurate data, in line with industry best practise and legislation.

Why do we need one? The spectral output of LEDs is significantly different to that of a traditional discharge light source, with many variables to take into consideration, including BIN, tolerance, colour temperature, junction temperature and secondary losses through optical systems such as lens and glazing. Additionally and very importantly, the drive current, thermal management and other factors relating to the luminaire in which the LEDs are mounted have a significant effect on total luminous flux so trying to extrapolate LED manufacturers technical data is impossible.

We continually strive for innovation as a means to positively affect the performance characteristics of our designs. Accurate measurement and reliable testing are the foundation of our product development activities. As part of our on-going commitment to have one of the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s most comprehensive lighting laboratories, we have made the significant investment of a market-leading Integrating Sphere.

Test facilities: Integrating sphere Measures lumen output. Use of a spectral radiometer allows measurement of colour temperature and colour rendering outputs â&#x20AC;&#x201C; information required by our customers, allowing us to issue accurate data in line with industry best practise and legislation.

The only truly accurate method is to measure the light output using an Integrating Sphere and spectroradiometer, allowing us to produce data in accordance with LM79. We can measure photopic lumens, scotopic lumens as well as scotopic-photopic (SP) ratios, an important metric and one that is referenced in the forthcoming update to BS 5489. On the 1 September 2010, EU legislation came into force requiring light output to be labelled in terms of lumens (the measure of visible light), instead of electrical Watts (the measure of electrical power supplied), to enable the fair comparison of lighting technologies.

Goniophotometer Measures the distribution of light and efficacy of a luminaire as a graphic format expressed as a polar diagram of luminous intensity. This is the basis for photometric data production and calculations. Ingress protection Measures ingress resistance levels to solids and liquids. Water ingress testing

With potentially misleading information on the market we believe that the accuracy of the data we are now able to supply will prevent disillusionment with LEDs as a light source and give specifiers the confidence to design schemes with deliverable performance.

Thermal compliance Tests thermal performance of proprietary components and the entire product within its envisaged environment.

Electrical protection Tests electrical safety, wiring and insulation compliance, electrical strength and earth continuity. Impact protection Tests resistance to external mechanical forces, in accordance with the IK Code. Vibration protection Tests resistance to external wind and vibration forces. Life endurance Determines long-term continuity of performance and compliance to standards. All our products are designed, manufactured and tested under a Quality Assurance system, registration number 53278, for BS EN ISO 9001:2000.

Radio suppression Tests compliance with radio frequency interference suppression to the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations.

The Integrating Sphere, which encapsulates all light, has an optical sensor located in a satellite sphere to accurately measure only the reflected light.

Impact test on glazing

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

White Light Changing the world with energy efficient white light High pressure sodium lamps have been the first choice in street lighting for a number of years, mainly because they produce high levels of light for a given amount of energy and have a long, reliable lifespan. However, their distinctive yellow/ orange light makes it difficult to distinguish colours. Today outdoor lighting no longer has to rely on yellow high pressure sodium light. Alternative light sources, such as LED and metal halide lamps combine high-quality white light with a very high efficacy, superior to that of high pressure sodium. For further information on these technologies and the energy savings that can be achieved with LED see pages 32 – 33, CosmoPolis lamps see pages 20 – 21 and StreetWise lamps see pages 22 – 23.

When there is insufficient or no daylight, we have to rely on alternatives to illuminate our world. As far back as 1417, lanterns with candles were used on the streets of London on winter nights. The subsequent invention of gas, oil and finally electric street lighting helped bring urban areas out of the dark ages. Today, billions of people take street lighting for granted. Why use white light in outdoor lighting? Accident prevention White light makes the streets safer for drivers and pedestrians. Improved visibility means much better road safety. Tests show that drivers are able to detect roadside movement faster and from a greater distance with white light. Crucially, this gives them more time to stop if a child, adult or animal is about to cross their path. Sense of safety and crime reduction White light plays a crucial role in helping people feel safer when they are outdoors at night. Superior colour rendering and a high level of perceived brightness make it easier to distinguish objects, colours, shapes and people. In particular, it makes facial recognition easier, even from a distance, and this really helps to reduce anxiety levels. Research has shown that white light promotes a virtuous cycle – when people feel safer, they stay in the streets later and in larger numbers. Beautification White light plays a major role within architectural lighting schemes to create striking effects in order to highlight important features. The use of different variations of colour temperature within the white light range ensures that a contrast exists between area and feature lighting.

Mesopic vision In recent years, many studies have taken place to try and understand how the eye perceives white light compared to the yellow light of high pressure sodium (SON) light sources. The use of white light for street lighting has increased as the efficacies and colour properties have improved, ensuring it provides comparable light output to a traditional high pressure sodium scheme for a similar amount of energy consumption. Scotopic vision is the term used for low light level vision, where the eye utilises only the rod receptors for sight, picking out movement but no discernible colours or definition. Photopic vision is the opposite of this, whereby well-lit conditions encourage the cone receptors, responsible for colour and definition, to be used for sight. When artificial street lighting is used, we create lighting levels which lie somewhere between Photopic and Scotopic vision, known as Mesopic vision. During this state, both photopic and scotopic vision is required to be able to see. Research has found that the quality of white light alters our perception of brightness, allowing lower lighting levels with white light to create the same eye response to those requiring higher lighting levels using a yellow light source.

S/P ratios at lower wattages (or dimmed) to provide the same perceived light level as high wattage, low S/P ratio sources. In general, white light sources have high S/P ratios and with yellow/orange sources these ratios are low. This reduction in light output when using white light sources has been recognised by the British lighting standards. The level of illumination required on subsidiary roads and paths may be reduced by as much as 30% if the light source has a colour rendering index of 60Ra or higher. Future lighting standards will utilise these reductions in light levels if white light sources are adopted more widely than at present. This will ensure that enough lighting is being provided to correctly illuminate the required area whilst being able to reduce the installed wattage of a product by opting for a white light source. By utilising the accuracy of our integrating sphere, we are able to measure both the photopic and scotopic lumens created by a light source. The ratio between the two, expressed as a single number, is required to calculate the reduction in lighting level which can be employed to create a similar lit scene to that of a high pressure sodium scheme lit to a higher lighting level.

Scotopic/Photopic Ratios In order to understand the level to which a white light source can be dimmed relative to a SON source and be perceived by the human eye to give the same level of brightness, the ratio of scotopic to photopic lumens (S/P ratio) must be understood. The higher the ratio, the better the light is at stimulating the eye and therefore we can use light sources with high

Monaro Victoria Way, Ashford

Sorento, Westfield, Stratford City

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

CosmoPolis

Energy Savings Solution In the past, one of the main reasons for using high-pressure sodium lamps was energy efficiency. However, thanks to ongoing innovation, white light has made a breakthrough in energy efficiency with the Philips CosmoPolis system that can reach up to 120 lm/W. This means that you can save energy by using CosmoPolis instead of high-pressure sodium lamps in new lighting installations. If you use advanced drivers with integrated controls, additional savings of up to 40% can be made through dimming.

A public lighting project will typically have a life-cycle of 25 to 30 years. The total cost of ownership over this period consists of the initial investment and ongoing maintenance and energy costs. The energy cost accounts for the largest portion of the total, and therefore offers the greatest potential for savings. A small additional investment can have a huge impact on the energy consumption over the entire life of an installation. This means a return on investment (ROI) for the additional expenditure is positive in 3 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 5 years, depending on energy prices. Investment cost The total investment cost depends mainly on the choice of luminaire, lamp system and whether it offers dimming. Although, in many cases the advanced optics, in combination with the CosmoPolis system, will result in wider spacing requirements and therefore fewer luminaires to light the street, making extra investment in new columns a consideration. Energy cost The energy cost depends mainly on the choice of lamp system. CosmoPolis has the highest efficiency (20% better than high-pressure sodium) and can be combined with electronic dimming solutions to generate additional savings of up to 40%. The use of white light can bring lower lighting levels and therefore even greater energy savings. If energy costs rise, reducing energy use becomes even more critical. Maintenance cost Thanks to the high reliability and long lifetime performance of the CosmoPolis Xtra system, maintenance cycles can be extended. While the initial service lifetime (90% survivals) of 4 years already set the industry benchmark, continued innovation now delivers reliable performance for up to 6 years (24,000 burning hours).

CosmoPolis System Warranty The long lifetime and reliability of the CosmoPolis system is underpinned with testing evidence. For that reason Philips gives an 8 year warranty on the Xtreme gear and a 3 year warranty on the lamp when operated on a Philips ballast.

CosmoPolis system is the key to unlocking energy savings The high efficiency of CosmoPolis is driven even higher with the use of electronic dimming gear. By dimming street lighting at appropriate times, CosmoPolis instantly uses even less energy, reduces costs and light pollution. The DynaVision Xtreme range can dim the CosmoPolis lamp down to 50% light output without a negative effect on lamp performance. There are now several control options available for CosmoPolis systems, from easy, integrated stand-alone dimming like LumiStep to full CMS compatibility using a DALI interface. These options allow for a very efficient and cost effective solution for every installation.

Xtreme driver The full range of PrimaVision and DynaVision products is now designed with Xtreme technology, delivering long life and reliable operation. The product is designed to perform under typical outdoor conditions with moisture, dust, vibrations and shocks and reach at least a 20 years lifetime with exceptionally low failure rates. Xtreme technology also protects against electrical surges on the mains and will not extinguish the light, fail or allow these surges to reduce system lifetime. It even protects the gear from lightning strikes of up to 5kA/10kV.

For detailed lamp information see pages 314 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 315 CosmoPolis lamps are now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminaires See individual Product Codes for availability

www.philips.com/cosmopolis

In addition, CosmoPolis lamps are extremely low in mercury content compared with high pressure sodium lamps.

Evora Tabard Sreet, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

StreetWise

™

CMH Technology Until now, public authorities and other organisations have had to choose between high cost, high quality outdoor illumination or low cost alternatives which, even at peak efficiency, make streets and other areas look less inviting. Scene lit with high pressure sodium lighting

Ceramic Metal Halide (CMH) outdoor lighting offers the best of both worlds, offering bright, white light and low running and maintenance costs. With CMH lighting, streets and other public spaces can feel safer for pedestrians. Furthermore, the good colour rendering of these lamps improves the ability of drivers to recognise shapes and colours, especially in peripheral vision. It promotes quicker driver response times, too. CMH lighting delivers competitive levels and higher quality of light compared with high pressure sodium (HPS) with similar energy consumption; it combines the efficiency of HPS with the whiteness of metal halide. As well as good colour rendering and reduced running costs, the combination of CMH technology with suitable electronic gear ensures excellent and sustained rates of durability, while the compact nature of the light sources enables designers to ensure consistent light distribution in any application.

The European Union continues to apply pressure to eliminate outdated, inefficient lighting. Under ErP Regulations, manufacturers will be required to phase-out a number of popular lamp types between 2012 and 2017. The reason for these changes is clear as lighting now accounts for more than 20 per cent of energy consumption around the world. CMH technology complies with all the current and pending EU requirements for lamps, and can therefore be specified with the confidence that the technology will not be out of date in a few years’ time. GE Lighting’s CMH StreetWise™ ceramic metal halide produces lumen output per system Watt greater than competitive technologies, enabling end users to cut energy bills. Users can simply replace existing luminaires with lower-wattage CMH StreetWise™ lamped products on a one-for-one basis or fit the same wattage CMH StreetWise™ and reduce the number of luminaires required. Either way, as well as reduced energy costs, they also benefit from the high reliability and lower re-lamping cycles of CMH technology.

Dimming for further energy saving

Ultimate performance

CMH StreetWise™ lamps can be dimmed with relatively little effect on their colour performance, offering the potential for further energy savings.

GE ConstantColor™ CMH StreetWise™ lamps are fitted with standard E27/E40 bases used for high pressure sodium lamp types, allowing direct replacement in existing luminaires. The lamps support both electronic and magnetic gear types and can be dimmed, outperforming most standard HID systems.

The colour performance of lamps in the StreetWise™ range is such that, when dimmed, they provide similar colour properties. Colour rendering is 70Ra at full power and 65Ra at 65% power; Colour temperature increases by 400K when dimmed to 65% power. This ensures that if used throughout a scheme, there will be no noticeable different in colour during dimmed periods.

With the high reliability and sustained lumen output across a longer working life of 24,000 hours, this relates to around 6 years of regular usage within a street lighting scheme. This helps to reduce maintenance cycles and the costs associated with regular lamp changes, providing further savings. Features: • Excellent white light with efficiency up to 111 lm/W • Lumen maintenance, 80% at 12,000 hours • Wide range: 50W/70W/100W/150W • Direct retrofits with High Pressure Sodium lamp types • Dimmable (with the exception of 50W on electromagnetic ballast) • System flexibility, operating on both electronic and magnetic gear

For detailed lamp information see pages 314 – 315 StreetWise lamps are now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminaires See individual Product Codes for availability

www.gelighting.com/eu

Scene lit with StreetWise ceramic metal halide

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Control & Dim Giving you the control you need The Carbon Reduction Commitment (CRC) is now in place to ensure users of energy are also taking active steps to reduce their carbon consumption. This places further importance on taking extra steps to reduce electricity consumption. We want to support our customers who are facing these difficult choices by offering a range of options to cover the potential solutions available. This means that the majority of our products now have the ability to be manufactured with pre-set dimming or switching schedules as standard, giving you the control you need.

With the ever increasing global demand for energy and the decreasing availability of natural resources, it is now imperative for all of us to consider carefully energy use. In recent times many local authorities and private sector businesses have had to consider the possibility of implementing a routine to either dim or switch off street lighting in order to reduce energy costs and the associated carbon usage. Option ‘PS’ – Part Night Switch

Option ‘PD’ – Part Night Dim

Option ‘C’ – Full CMS Interface

One option is to switch off exterior lighting altogether for the part of night when traffic levels are much lower and areas are not in use – typically the early hours of the morning.

Utilising intelligent photocells and control gear we can supply a predefined dimming schedule designed to reduce energy consumption and lighting levels.

Using photocell controls similar to that in the Part Night Dim setup, lighting can be controlled to switch off between certain periods rather than be dimmed.

By implementing a dimming regime to an exterior lighting scheme, it is possible to save around 40% on energy bills without having to completely switch off the lighting. This ensures that a level of light is still present for security and access reasons without impacting on the environment.

Using a Central Management System (CMS) such as Harvard LeafNut, Mayflower, Telensa or Zodion, users can control a number of exterior lighting components through a central web based system.

Using this type of arrangement, users can expect somewhere in the region of a 50% reduction in energy costs as well as the associated carbon reduction. The standard DW Windsor option covers complete switch off between Midnight and 6am via a part-night photocell. Other times and solutions can be offered also, contact us at answers@dwwindsor.com for further details. To choose this option for specific products, please choose Option ‘PS’ under photocell control within the Product Code table.

The standard DW Windsor option covers dimming down to 25% (dependant on light source) between Midnight and 6am. Other times and dimming levels can be offered in addition to this, contact us at answers@dwwindsor.com for further details. To choose this option for specific products, please choose Option ‘PD’ under photocell control within the Product Code table.

This allows dimming and switching regimes to be designed and implemented as users see fit. The majority of these systems also report back on details such as energy consumption, operating conditions and life expectancy. Speak to one of our Project Engineers to find out more information about the current CMS software we are able to integrate with. To choose this option for specific products, please choose one of the following options under photocell control within the Product Code table. Option ‘CH’ – Harvard LeafNut (see pages 26-27) Options ‘CM’ – Mayflower CLC Options ‘CT’ – Telensa PLANet Options ‘CZ’ – Zodion Vizion

For more product specific information on the Harvard LeafNut CMS system, please see pages 26 – 27

Monaro Victoria Way, Ashford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

LeafNut

For Ultimate Lighting Control There has recently been much discussion about how to deal with the subject of street lighting energy consumption, which is widely regarded as a major contributor to carbon emissions. Switching lights off completely during off-peak periods to save energy and reduce pollution has been discussed and tested, resulting in public outcry that complete blackouts may have a major impact on crime levels and road safety.

LeafNut is a complete turn-key solution for street lighting equipment, from ballast to the secure user interface; it allows street lighting systems to integrate seamlessly with each other. This gives local authorities the ability to effectively and efficiently manage public street lighting by dimming lights as and when required, instead of having to resort to turning them off. Using the Internet, modern electronics and innovative wireless technology, LeafNut is already being used by around 100 local authorities worldwide.

LeafNode

As an alternative to complete switch off, many local authorities in the UK and across the world are looking at technologically advanced systems to help reduce street lighting levels, carbon emissions and make energy savings. Harvardâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s LeafNut system is leading the way in this field.

Supplied with an auto commissioning PDA tool, the LeafNut system is easy to install and configure. As soon as each LeafNode is connected, the GPS locates the exact position, specific serial number and the ballast type which is then automatically stored into the LeafNut system as well as asset management databases used by the local authority. BranchNode

LeafNode control integrated into Rio

LeafNut is deployed as part of a complete street lighting solution that also includes the WiMAC wireless Central Management System (CMS) protocol. This system, which has been tested in many field trials across the UK, ensures it is robust and ready to be widely implemented, allowing street lighting operators to remotely adjust the light output of each individual street light.

With the system, street lighting equipment can be controlled wirelessly and real time linked, through the use of a webserver and GPS, directly to the microprocessor in the electronic ballast. Street lights can be programmed with different switching or dimming regimes, corresponding to peak requirements such as rush hours and areas of late night entertainment or periods of reduced usage such as the early hours of the morning. By gathering information from each luminaireâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s ballast, LeafNut can accurately monitor all lighting units under its control. It provides on-screen diagnostics including operational efficiency, predicted lamp failure, ballast condition, fault finding and energy consumption. LeafNut has a mapping feature which utilises Google Maps to identify individual lamps showing their location, history and status, allowing fault reports with work orders to be automatically raised and emailed to maintenance crews. An Android App allows mobile monitoring of entire systems to deliver detailed summaries of performance statistics. This is especially useful in more remote areas where the system benefits isolated villages, eliminating the cost and carbon footprint of roving maintenance vehicles touring outlying districts on the lookout for failed lamps.

LeafNode control integrated into Windsor

UK street lighting is entirely unmetered and has traditionally been charged via inventory records and a photocell array, required to measure the switching times of all street lights within a location and hence calculates the cost of electricity. Before the introduction of CMS systems, no allowance or mechanism for variable lighting control has been possible. LeafNutâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s CMS was the first solution in the UK to directly measure actual consumption, allowing local and highway authorities to obtain the full financial benefits that can be realised from dimming street lighting levels.

LeafNut technology is now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminaires See individual Product Codes for availability

www.harvardeng.com

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Key Features

• Allows for increased column spacings giving lower capital, maintenance and running costs • Compatible with Philips CosmoPolis and GE Streetwise, as well as the full range of existing lamp types

Diamond Optic

The ultimate in flexible, precise lighting control

• An adjustable reflector profile to refine the light distribution

Our unique and revolutionary Diamond Optic® reflector system has been favoured by local authorities and private sector specifiers through out the UK since 1990, primarily because of its combination of high performance, exceptional versatility and control of light pollution. It is designed to create widely different light distribution patterns from a single luminaire style – and the optic can even be adjusted on-site during the life of the scheme to meet changing user requirements.

What is Diamond Optic®? The patented Diamond Optic® system comprises four multi-facetted reflector elements, arranged in the shape of a diamond – hence its name. These reflectors can be independently adjusted to create a wide range of composite light distributions. Each reflector produces a controlled beam that can put light precisely where it is needed – and the four beams combine to make possible a wide range of light patterns, appropriate to most types of area lighting installation.

A 5/35

Milano The Hub, Milton Keynes

B 10/10

Diamond Optic® – a versatile lighting design tool Diamond Optic® gives engineers and designers the freedom to tailor the lighting to the physical shape of the space being lit. For example, the same luminaire can be set up to offer a rectangular distribution for road lighting, a wider rectangular pattern for wide roads and pedestrian precincts – or a square formation for car parks. In a roadside situation, ‘back lighting’ to the adjacent pavements can be created to facilitate pedestrian safety.

Tailoring the light pattern to the specific area being lit also gives the planner freedom to place lighting columns where they look best, rather than being forced into layouts determined by inflexible light distributions. Equally importantly, the use of the Diamond Optic® enables column spacings to be increased, reducing the total number of lighting units required.

If you wish to find out more about this uniquely powerful optic, please contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600

C 31/35

D 5/25

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Diamond Optic

Setting A (5/35)

Setting B (10/10)

Typical Applications: Wide roads Car parks (from perimeter)

Typical Applications: Footpaths Cycle paths

The 5º reflectors light the near side pavement, the 35º reflectors light wide distances across from the luminaire.

Reflector pairs are pulled in to 10º to create a near symmetrical lozenge-shaped isolux template.

A highly flexible reflector system 5º

10º

35º

10º

Setting C (31/35)

Setting D (5/25)

Typical Applications: Open areas Car parks (from perimeter)

Typical Applications: Standard roads Wide pathways

This setting splits the distribution equally around the column and can dispense with the need for two luminaires on each column.

The 5° reflectors light the near side pavement, the 25° reflectors light a ‘standard’ road-width across from the luminaire.

31º

5º

35º

25º

The example illustrates the full flexibility, functionality and maximum efficiency that can be achieved with Diamond Optic®. One luminaire type can be used throughout a multi-area scheme, with different Diamond Optic® settings, to create the optimal lighting performance for each area.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Key Features

• Available as a retrofit LED solution for existing DW Windsor schemes or provides LED options for new luminaires

LED Light Engine

• Significant energy savings and reduced maintenance costs across all products • Simple on-site installation for retrofit • Equivalent distribution to Diamond Optic® A, B, C & D

Known for developing high performance solutions, such as our popular Diamond Optic®, we have introduced an easy and cost effective way to upgrade existing lighting schemes to LED, across our range of Contemporary to Traditional street lights.

• Energy saving dimming, switching and full CMS options

What is our LED Light Engine? Our commitment to include an LED version of all our product ranges has been the driving force behind introducing a selfcontained LED light source, called LED Light Engine. This is available as a replacement, retrofit light source for DW Windsor schemes installed less than 10 years ago, across a number of ranges. In addition, we are now able to create new LED versions of a wide range of our luminaires. Retrofit LED Designed for simple on-site retrofit into DW Windsor products, installed within the last 10 years, the LED Light Engine can be fitted directly into an existing lantern. In the same time as it takes to replace a lamp all the benefits of LED can be incorporated into a previously lamped scheme, without the cost of new luminaires.

Luminaires available with LED Light Engine Retrofit & New • DW400 pages 146 – 147 • Stratum pages 92 – 93 • Dover pages 96 – 97 • Windsor pages 110 – 111 • Strand Family pages 120 – 123 • Ely pages 124 – 125 • Iffley pages 130 – 131 New • Milano pages 48 – 51 • Evora LED pages 62 – 63 • Lancaster pages 112 – 113 • Knightsbridge pages 114 – 115 • Pall Mall/Westminster pages 116 – 117 • Hatfield pages 132 – 133 • York/Warwick pages 134 – 135 • Newport/Salisbury pages 136 – 137 • Waterford/Braemar pages 138 – 139 • Henley pages 140 – 141 • Tizona pages 250 – 251

Performance Equivalent to Diamond Optic® The optical performance of LED Light Engine has been designed to match that of our popular Diamond Optic, offering a choice of four different lighting distributions. The similarities are particularly useful when considering retrofitting LED as a light source into existing lanterns or schemes, where LED technology can be provided with relatively little effect on the lit environment. This is particularly interesting when considering reducing energy usage and lowering maintenance costs in an existing lamped scheme.

Array A

Array B

Performance Compared with Lamped Versions The DW Windsor LED Light Engine is available in three different sizes. The specific information on which LED Light Engine is available for each luminaire option can be found within the product code tables on each product page. Comparisons to light output of other light sources are below: Number of LEDs

Total Wattage

Comparison Light Source

29W

45W CosmoPolis / 50W SON-T

58W

60W CosmoPolis / 70W SON-T

87W

90W CosmoPolis / 100W SON-T

Compatible Control Options The following control options are available for luminaires using LED Light Engine as retrofit or new. • Switch: on/off through conventional photocell (or part-night switch off) • Dim: factory set/customer specific regime • Dali: full CMS/remote monitoring functionality: suitable for use with Harvard LeafNut, Telensa and Mayflower Light Source Information We use high performing Cree LEDs for this offering.

Array C

Array D

Colour Temperature / Colour Rendering (CRI): • 3000K (warm white) / 80Ra or • 4500K (neutral white) / 70Ra Light Engine Efficacy: 73 lm/W

Please contact answers@dwwindsor.co.uk for achievable savings or for assistance in planning an effective roll-out of upgrading to LED with our Light Engine

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Key Features • Designed specifically for roadway lighting solutions • Optimised to achieve the stringent ME class lighting levels for main roads utilising CosmoPolis, High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide light sources • Available in a wide range of DW Windsor products in Contemporary, Classic, Traditional and Functional product ranges

LX1 Luminance Optic DW Windsor is well known for its high performance, versatile and award-winning Diamond Optic® reflector system which provides a wide number of lighting distributions to suit both typical and unusual lighting scheme needs. In order to increase this offering further, we have developed a new Luminance Optic, the LX1, to increase the DWW product range for main road lighting schemes. As with the Diamond Optic®, the LX1 can be specified in many of our products, from Contemporary and functional to Classic and Traditional ranges to provide the highest performance lighting solution in the style of luminaire needed to suit the environment. Main road lighting schemes requires stringent lighting design parameters to be met, which often requires a different type of optic to be used. These are usually a single-piece pressed optic, which completely surrounds the lamp, with various facets to create the desired shape of light required on the ground. In order to ensure we provide the best possible solution to complement our product range, we are using the most up-todate, highly reflective material from which to manufacture the optic. This gives us excellent light output and reduced losses, whilst also creating the shape of light required to meet the lighting levels for main road lighting (see pages 310 – 311).

Adjustability In order to provide the greatest choice of options for light distribution, the LX1 Luminance Optic has numerous lamp settings available by simply adjusting the forward or backward position of the lamp holder. This can either be factory pre-set or adjusted on-site to ensure flexibility through design and installation.

Specification The precision engineered LX1 Luminance Optic can be specified within a range of our products simply through choosing this option within the product code table.

If you wish to find out more about this road optic, please contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600

Products with LX Luminance Optic options: • Evora pages 64 – 65 • Rio pages 80 – 81 • All Optima luminaires pages 92 – 99 • Akord Cone A & B pages 86 – 87 • Strand A & A+ pages 120 – 121 • Ely A pages 124 – 125

New LX1 Luminance Optic for main road lighting available in a range of products

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Unique Solutions If you need stylish, reliable and robust product solutions, any of our standard range of products will meet your requirements. If on the other hand you require a bespoke or unique solution our designers can help you to deliver your vision.

Brilliance Project, Blackpool

Sometimes we start from an architects’ drawing, sometimes from a tight technical specification. Just as importantly, there are times when our brief is nothing more than a half-formed notion in our customer’s imagination; whatever the initial input, the outcome is always as brilliant as its inspiration.

LED staircase Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

Bankside, London

02 Arena, Greenwich

Our bespoke solutions can be found all over the UK: Cleveleys Promenade, Edge Lane – Liverpool, the O2 Arena – London to name just a few and overseas in Singapore, Bahrain, Cyprus, Portugal and Dubai. No matter what the brief, our team are ready and waiting to respond to the challenge.

If you have your own unique product design requirement, contact your Project Engineer or Customer Services: e: customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk t: 01992 474600

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Refurbishments & Replicas Maintaining the overall look and feel of ‘Heritage’ lighting can be seen as both an art and a science; the lantern, column and embellishments have to remain authentic, yet comply with all the current lighting standards. DW Windsor has perfected this balance over a number of years to become one of the strongest in the industry.

Albert Embankment, London

By appointment to Her Majesty The Queen Manufacturer of Replicas and Refurbs DW Windsor Lighting Hertfordshire

Battersea Bridge, London

London Eye

Effective, respectful restoration involves all the traditional craftsmanship and skill that went into the product’s original creation. But making a vintage luminaire meet modern performance and quality standards calls for a whole new set of talents: the design ingenuity and technical expertise to build the latest optics and electrical components into housings originally designed for a very different, less demanding age.

Tower Bridge, London

Battersea Bridge, London

There are plenty of companies capable of ‘tidying up’ worn and weathered columns and lanterns. We prefer a hands-on approach with real involvement which can mean deconstructing each piece of equipment, rebuilding, re-engineering and sensitively recreating a product as good as new or better.

For further information contact Customer Services: e: customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk t: 01992 474600

Having often worked with English Heritage, we take the responsibility of preserving important parts of the nation’s architectural legacy very seriously, ensuring every detail is as historically authentic as it is technically excellent.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Light Solutions

Urban Furniture Not just a lighting manufacturer, DW Windsor offers a wide range of urban furniture products which perfectly reflect our vision; to offer immensely stylish, quality furniture that also delivers on performance. Many of our products are designed to work alongside our lighting products to ensure completely holistic design solutions can be achieved. For further information or to register for a catalogue please contact Customer Services: e: customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk t: 01992 474600 or visit www.dwwindsor.co.uk

Cube Bench Orchard Theatre, Dartford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Contemporary Enhancing beautiful spaces

Milano LED Bankside, London

73% energy savings achieved with LED Light Engine

Milano

Monaro LED II

Monaro

Evora LED

44 – 51

52 – 55

52 – 57

58 – 63

Bankside case study

Evora

Camaro

Sorento

Barosa

58 – 65

66 – 73

74 – 77

78 – 79

Rio

Manhattan

Toronto

Akord Cone

80 – 81

82 – 83

84 – 85

86 – 87

Akord Bullet

Forza

86 – 87

88 – 89

Creative styling and high performance are two prerequisites for this range of contemporary luminaires. Whether lighting needs to be discrete or to make a statement, there is a luminaire to enhance any environment including business developments, retail or leisure parks and pedestrian areas. Designed to maximise performance and aid future-proofing, many ranges are compatible with leading Central Management Systems and/or offer dimming and switching options. In addition, they use LED or other efficient light sources to match styling with performance.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Milano

Milano Inspired by architecture

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Features • Choice of straight or curved arms

Milano enhances prestigious urban spaces and architectural landscapes from city centres to corporate car parks.

• Wide choice of light sources • LED provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® settings

By day or night the clean lines and simple geometry provide visual empathy with surroundings, as seen at numerous landmark installations including The Gherkin, London.

• CMS compatible or other control options available • High quality aluminium construction

With an all-aluminium construction and wide range of available light sources including LED, Milano ensures scheme longevity. Energy savings are achievable through a range of leading Central Management Systems or via simple dimming and switching options.

Milano offers a choice of straight or curved arms

Milano LED Bankside, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Milano St. Marys Axe, The Gherkin, London

Contemporary

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Milano curved arm

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model MIL

MIL

2. Arm Style C

Curved Arms

Flat Toughened Glass

Polycarbonate Bowl

3. Glazing

4. Mounting 76

76mm Ø

5. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Installation and Maintenance

Milano curved arm For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Cable termination within product base

Glazing: Flat toughened glass (standard) Polycarbonate bowl Mounting: 76mm Ø 89mm Ø (available on request) Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

Milano

Tool-less access via quarter-turn latch and hinged lid

curved arm

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

D 5/25

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

Light source: See product codes

6. Light Source 050S

Options

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

• Straight arm option available see pages 50 – 51 Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution L230

Other: Obtrusive light shield (polycarbonate bowl)

Materials

7. Colour – for alternative colours see below 20

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

8. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution A

Suggested column/ bracket options

10/10 31/35

Arms: High pressure die cast aluminium

5/25

Canopy: Spun aluminium

9. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = MIL C F 76 E L230 20 B U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 9005

Base: High pressure die cast aluminium

RAL 9016

Milano with curved arms shown on Tapered Aluminium 5m column

Milano with curved arms shown on Tubular Steel 4m column

5/35

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

630

700

Weight kg

Windage

0.16m2

Milano LED Heron Tower, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Milano straight arm

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model MIL

MIL

2. Arm Style S

Straight Arms

Flat Toughened Glass

Polycarbonate Bowl

3. Glazing

4. Mounting 76

76mm Ø

5. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Installation and Maintenance

Milano straight arm For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Cable termination within product base

Milano

Tool-less access via quarter-turn latch and hinged lid

straight arm

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

D 5/25

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

Light source: See product codes

6. Light Source 050S

Options

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

• Curved arm option available see pages 48 – 49 Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution L230

Other: Obtrusive light shield (polycarbonate bowl)

Materials

7. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Suggested column/ bracket options

10/10

31/35

Arms: High pressure die cast aluminium

5/25

Canopy: Spun aluminium

9. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = MIL S F 76 E L230 20 B U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 7016

Base: High pressure die cast aluminium

5/35

RAL 9005

RAL 9016

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

8. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution Milano with straight arms shown on Tubular Steel 4m column

20 Milano with straight arms shown on Tapered Aluminium 5m column

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

630

700

Weight kg

Windage

0.16m2

Derby Station

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Monaro

Monaro Engineered for longevity

IP66 | IK09 | CLASS I

Features • Wide choice of light sources

Monaro’s low-profile design combines simplicity with functionality. Invisible mounting fixings and flush access latches contribute to a smooth profile to suit any surrounding, from amenity to residential and car park lighting.

• LED version provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® setting D • CMS compatible or other control options available • Direct or side entry mounting

Offering optimal road lighting distribution, Monaro is available in a wide range of light sources, including CosmoPolis and LED, providing superior life-time performance. Monaro LED’s unique thermal management system extends life further still, with independent testing certifying in excess of 85,000 hours.

• High quality aluminium construction

With a future-proof (wholly upgradable) design and virtually zero upward light, Monaro assists the environmentally conscious designer with energy control systems such as CMS and dimming options giving additional efficiencies.

Robust future-proof design AMRC building, Sheffield

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model MOR

MOR

2. Mounting Side Entry

Direct Entry

3. Glazing 8m

Polycarbonate Low Profile Bowl

Pressed Low Profile Toughened Glass

4. Light Source

LD40

24 x 2.4W LED – Neutral White 4500K

LD40

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 6m

RAL 7016 Anhracite Grey

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Monaro LED II

Smooth, easy to clean glazing

LED Array Distribution

IP66 | IK09 | CLASS I

D 5/25

Glazing: Polycarbonate low-profile bowl Pressed low-profile toughened glass Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

L70 Lifetime prediction: 86,500 hours (independently tested)

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Improved efficacy and colour rendering giving increased light output and lower energy consumption (compared with Monaro LED)

Optical distribution shown is equivalent to the Diamond Optic® D See pages 28 – 31 for details

• Road distribution equivalent to Diamond Optic® D setting

Total circuit watts: 63W U

Example Code = MOR D G LD40 20 D U

Suggested column/ bracket options

Colour temperature: 4500K Colour rendering index: 70Ra Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey Optical control: LED Array Distribution

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Materials Body: High pressure die cast aluminium Access: High pressure die cast latch Seals: Single piece silicone Finish: Polyester powder coated

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

C 40

RAL 9005

5/25

Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [60mm Ø & 76mm Ø] with 0º tilt

Light source: High performance Cree LEDs

7. Switching, Dimming & Control

RAL 9016

Monaro LED II shown on Tapered Steel 5m column

Monaro LED II shown on Tubular Steel 5m column with Linear column bracket

Ease of access via quick release latch

6. LED Array Distribution 5m

Installation and Maintenance

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

610

330

142

Weight kg

Windage

0.09m2

Options Monaro LED II For mounting at 4 – 6 metres

Monaro LED II

Contemporary

Clacton Promenade

LED detail

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Monaro

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model MOR

MOR

2. Mounting S

Side Entry

Direct Entry

3. Glazing L

Polycarbonate Low Profile Bowl (up to 90W max)

Polycarbonate Deep Bowl (100, 140 & 150W only)

Low Profile Toughened Glass (all wattages)

4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

5. Light Source

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

070S

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

Tool-less maintenance via quick release latch and hinged cover

Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [60mm Ø & 76mm Ø] with 0º & +5º tilt

Diamond Optic® A 5/35

IP66 | IK09 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Glazing: Polycarbonate low-profile bowl [up to 90W only] Polycarbonate deep bowl [100W and above only] Pressed low-profile toughened glass [all wattages] Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

Monaro

C 31/35

• LED option available see pages 54 – 55

D 5/25

• Easy clean profile for reduced maintenance

See pages 28 – 31 for details

Light source: See product codes Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

Other: Zebra crossing version available 20

See page 298 – 301 for details

Materials C

8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

Suggested column/ bracket options

Installation and Maintenance

Monaro For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Optical control: Diamond Optic®

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Body: High pressure die cast aluminium Access: High pressure die cast latch Seals: Single piece silicone Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = MOR D G M 070S 20 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Dimensions mm

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

Side entry RAL 7016

150S

RAL 9005

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

RAL 9016

100S

7. Diamond Optic® Setting

Monaro shown on Tapered Steel 5m column

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

20 Monaro shown on Tubular Steel 5m column with Linear column bracket

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below

050S

Options

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight Windage kg

C•

610

330

180

142

•with low profile glazing

0.09m2 Victoria Way, Ashford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Evora

Evora Exceptional thermal management

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Features • Wide range of light sources

Evora is a contemporary, low-profile luminaire engineered to incorporate the very latest technologies including integral electronic gear and remote monitoring systems.

• LED provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® settings • CMS compatible or other control options available • Main road lighting using new LX1 Luminance Optic

Available in a wide range of light sources including LED and MasterColour CDM-T Elite MW. With mounting heights up to 10m, Evora’s unrivalled Cool-Zone thermal management offers superior life-time performance.

• 8 year guarantee on standard electronic ballasts

With a clean, unobtrusive design, without visible fastenings and wide range of bracket options, Evora fits elegantly into any surrounding including road, residential, amenity and car park lighting.

Uninterrupted profile and tool-less access via push-button latch

Evora shown with C1 column bracket Archer Road, Stevenage

Tabard Street, Southwark, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Evora Tabard Street, London

Contemporary

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Evora LED

Contemporary

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Evora LED For mounting at 4 – 8 metres

Tool-free access via single push button latch for ease of maintenance

EVO

Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [76mm Ø]

LED Array Distribution

1. Model EVO 2. Mounting

Evora C1

Evora C8

Side Entry

Direct Entry

3. Glazing P

Polycarbonate Bowl

Flat Toughened Glass

4. Control Gear Evora C9

Evora C10

Electronic Gear

5. Light Source L230 7m

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L330

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L345

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L245

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

31/35

5/25

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS) Light source: See product codes

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

A 5/35

Evora LED IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • See pages 64 – 65 for lamped versions C 31/35

• Extremely low profile design, without visible fastenings

D 5/25

• High transmission flat glass for enhanced optical performance and zero upward light • UMSUG approved

See pages 32 – 33 for details

Materials

8. Switching, Dimming & Control

Body: High pressure die cast aluminium U

Canopy: Spun aluminium Latches: High pressure die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = EVO D F E L245 20 C U

Suggested column/ bracket options For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Dimensions mm

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

LED detail RAL 7037

10/10

RAL 7016

5/35

RAL 9005

RAL 9016

Evora shown on Tapered Steel 5m column

Evora shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with Linear column bracket

7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic

Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl Flat toughened glass

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

Bowl

165

518

17.0

0.07m2

Flat glass

132

518

17.5

0.05m2

Evora Chesterton Road, London

Bowl option

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Evora

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model EVO

EVO

2. Mounting S

Side Entry

Direct Entry

3. Glazing P

Polycarbonate Bowl

Flat Toughened Glass

4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources Evora C1

Evora C8

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

5. Light Source

Evora C9

Evora C10

10m

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

250S

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

210W

210W CDM-T Elite MW

Tool-free access via single push button latch for ease of maintenance

Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [76mm Ø]

Diamond Optic® A 5/35

Evora IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

B 10/10

Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl Flat toughened glass Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS) Light source: See product codes Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

090W

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LX1 Luminance Optic

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options C 31/35

• LED version now available (see pages 62 – 63)

D 5/25

• Extremely low profile design, without visible fastenings • High transmission flat glass for enhanced optical performance and zero upward light

See pages 28 – 31 for details

• UMSUG approved

LX1 Luminance Optic

• NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Materials

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

Body: High pressure die cast aluminium

7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic

Canopy: Spun aluminium

5/35

10/10

Latches: High pressure die cast aluminium

31/35

5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)

Suggested column/ bracket options

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = EVO D F E 090W 20 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Dimensions mm

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

Bowl option RAL 7016

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

RAL 9005

100S

RAL 9016

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

Installation and Maintenance

Evora For mounting at 4 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS Evora shown on Tapered Steel 5m column

070S

20 Evora shown on Tubular Steel 10m column with Linear column bracket

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below

050S

Options

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

Bowl

165

518

17.0

0.07m2

Flat glass

132

518

17.5

0.05m2

Edgeware Road, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Camaro

Camaro Intelligently designed optics

IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

Features • Compact, circular luminaire

Camaro’s slim profile is designed to minimise daytime impact; offering a consistent look for foot paths, from residential roads and car parks to major traffic routes.

• Performance-engineered optical lens and concave glazing design • Different lighting distributions with the same look for project continuity

Using precisely-positioned, individually directed and controlled LEDs it optimises light output while providing the desired uniformity of distribution. Camaro’s innovative concave glazing design ensures zero upward light above the horizontal, achieving a class-leading glare rating of G6 in the Area and Path models and G3 for Camaro Road.

• Suitable for lighting main, residential roads, cycleways and city centres • Managed LED light output gives in excess of 60,000 hours service life

To help meet your carbon reduction commitments Camaro offers a flexible range of energy management options including basic stand-alone switching and factory-set dimming.

Nema and Miniature photocell options available, located off-luminaire to reduce visual impact and ensure ingress protection

Camaro Road Swindon Cycle Path

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Camaro

Road, Area, Path

Camaro Road Designed specifically for road lighting, whether high traffic highways or residential street, achieving the higher and more stringent requirements. Providing a neutral white (4000K) and available in 36, 72 or 108 LEDs for mounting at 6 – 12 metres.

Camaro Road (36 LED) mounted at 8m

Available in a choice of two colour temperatures: Warm White (3200K) and Neutral White (4000K). Suitable for mounting heights from 4m (22 LEDs) to 12m (108 LEDs), Camaro has a choice of three optical distributions to best-match your project requirements and provide continuity throughout your scheme.

Smithfield, Dublin

Camaro Area Designed to maximise the spread of light over a wide area, by providing a 160º beam, ideal for illuminating parks, squares, car parks and typical conflict areas. For mounting at 6 – 12 metres, Camaro Area provides a neutral white (4000K) and is available with 36, 72 or 108 LEDs.

Camaro Area

Camaro Area (72 LED) mounted at 6m

M20 Footbridge, Ashford

Camaro Bracket Options

Camaro Path

Camaro Road/Area

Single arm 500mm projection

Designed specifically to distribute light along linear pathways & cycle paths. For mounting at 4 – 6 metres, in an inviting warm white (3200K).

Camaro Path (22 LED) mounted at 5m

Swindon Cycle Path Single arm 1000mm projection

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Camaro

Contemporary

The Camaro range has been designed solely with LED as its light source, therefore the technical information for this product differs to that of a conventional street lighting product. Innovative positioning of the LEDs creates a pattern of light by ensuring each LED within the array is optimally orientated to maximise the lighting distribution. By grouping the LEDs in banks of 12 and adjusting the current accordingly, we can carefully balance the output of the entire product, enhancing the optical performance.

Camaro

Drive Current Details Camaro Road 36 LED Version 12 LEDs @ 550mA 12 LEDs @ 530mA 12 LEDs @ 510mA 72 LED Version

design philosophy

48 LEDs @ 320mA 24 LEDs @ 350mA 108 LED Version 108 LEDs @ 350 mA

Camaro Area 36 LED Version 12 LEDs @ 450mA 12 LEDs @ 400mA 12 LEDs @ 350mA 72 LED Version 24 LEDs @ 450mA 24 LEDs @ 250mA 24 LEDs @ 200mA 108 LED Version 36 LEDs @ 450mA 36 LEDs @ 220mA 36 LEDs @ 200mA

Camaro Path 22 LED Version 11 LEDs @ 150mA 11 LEDs @ 300mA 22 LED High Output Version 11 LEDs @ 250mA 11 LEDs @ 500mA

High Efficiency Light System Performance Engineered From inception, Camaro’s design has been driven by technology, providing precise lighting control and impressive efficiency. This has been achieved through state-of-the-art LED lenses and an innovative diffusing screen, to reduce refraction. Camaro’s High Efficiency Lighting System optimises performance and quality of light through meticulous positioning of the LEDs and its uniquely shaped glazing; providing uniform light distribution and glare-free illumination with no light spill above 90º.

Camaro key advantages Performance • High performance Cree LEDs for energy savings, long life and reduced maintenance (in excess of 60,000 hours service life) • Reduced energy consumption (when compared to conventional light sources) by up to 68%: further savings achievable through the addition of a dimming regime • Intelligent thermal management, ensures high efficacy and long life of LEDs • State-of-the-art lens and unique concave glazing provide a uniform light distribution and glare-free illumination, with no light spill above 90º • Clean, white light: no harmful infra red or ultra violet radiation or chemicals such as mercury • Instantaneous lighting, even in extremely cold temperatures (down to –40ºC) Control • Precise positioning of the LEDs, critical lens design and management of the drive current ensure optimum optical performance and life

Advanced Cooling System Thermal Management Key to maximising the life of the LEDs is efficient thermal management. Camaro’s intelligently managed thermal design increases LED life and improves efficiency by maintaining a low junction temperature. Its Advanced Cooling System, an innovative die cast aluminium LED mounting platform with integral cooling fins, ensures effective heat dissipation.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Camaro

Product Codes Road CAR

Optical control: Road Optic distribution designed specifically for main road lighting

Area

Example

Road For mounting at 6 – 12 metres

CAP

CAA

CAR

Path For mounting at 4 – 6 metres

2. Light Source 022L

22 LED High Output 036L

036H

36 LED 36 LED High Ouput

072L

72 LED

108L

108 LED

072L

3. Colour 16

Textured Basalt Grey

Textured Aluminium

4. Switching, Dimming & Control – factory-set dimming options available on request N

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Example Code = CAR 072L 16 U

Glazing: Concave PMMA diffuser

Materials

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell or on/off switching using Nema socket Factory set dimming options

Glazing: PMMA

• Uses long life, energy saving LED • Consistent look for paths, roads and car park lighting • Zero light above the horizontal and glare rating G6 (Path & Area) or G3 (Road)

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Installation and Maintenance

Road 36 LED (48W) 36 LED High Output (66W) 72 LED (82W) 108 LED (122W)

Supplied with cable tails: Road: 10m Area: 8m Path: 6m Remote positioning of photocell ensures ingress protection of product during any required maintenance

Area 36 LED (51W) 72 LED (73W) 108 LED (105W)

• Energy saving dimming and switching options

Seals: Silicone rubber

Path 22 LED (19W) 22 LED High Output (32W) 10m

• Range of circular, low profile luminaires

Body: High pressure die cast aluminium

Light source: High performance Cree LEDs

No Photocell

IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

Area Optic distribution designed specifically for maximum light spread

Mounting: Direct entry: 76mm Ø Side entry: 60mm Ø

Camaro

Path Optic distribution designed specifically for linear path lighting

Area For mounting at 6 – 12 metres

22 LED

022H 036L

Options

Path

1. Model

LED Array Distribution Path

Road

L70 lifetime prediction: In excess of 60,000 hours

Colour temperature: Path: 3200K (warm white) or Road/Area: 4000K (neutral white)

Colour Rendering Index (CRI): Road/Area: 75Ra Path: 85Ra

Colours: RAL 7012 Textured Basalt Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium

Area

Camaro Path on 4m tubular column

Camaro Area on 8m conical column

4m Camaro Road on 10m conical column

Path

Suggested column/bracket options For full range of columns and brackets see page 256 Road/Area Dimensions mm

Weight kg

Windage

Path

340

470

240

300

4.5

0.04m2

Road/Area

146

500

750

240

500

10.5

0.08m2

M20 Footbridge, Ashford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Sorento

Sorento Timeless iconic design

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

Features • Tall, slim design

Sorento’s timeless design brings elegance to prestigious developments or historic surroundings alike.

• Aluminium construction • Choice of light sources including LED

Attention to detail provides a truly iconic post-top lighting solution through innovative engineering. Illumination of the graceful supporting arms render the Sorento equally beautiful by day or night.

• Effective Diamond Optic® distribution • Energy control options including CMS

With an aluminium construction and wide range of light sources including LED, Sorento provides outstanding quality to meet the most onerous technical performance criteria. Efficiencies are achieved through a range of flexible energy management options from basic stand-alone switching to full remote-monitoring integration.

Designed in conjunction with Priestmangoode and Speirs & Major Associates

Westfield, Stratford City

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Sorento

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model SOR

SOR

2. Light Source

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L130

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

5/25

140W

Suggested column/ bracket options

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

B 10/10

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

C 31/35

• Equally suited to both historic and modern urban spaces

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Body: Spun aluminium

Part Night Dim

Canopy: Cast aluminium

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

Latch: Stainless steel

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Materials U

Base frame: Cast aluminium

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = SOR 140W 20 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 9005

31/35

RAL 9016

10/10

Sorento

Ease of lamp replacement via quick release hinged glass

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

5. Switching, Dimming & Control Sorento shown on special wall bracket

Sorento shown on Tapered Aluminum 6m column

5/35

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Light source: See product codes

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

Cable termination within product base

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear only Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

4. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution A

Installation and Maintenance

Glazing: Flat toughened glass

3. Colour – for alternative colours see below 5m

Options Sorento For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight Windage kg

1693

380

0.22m2

Sorento with special LED marker Westfield, Stratford City

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Barosa

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model BAR

BAR

2. Optic Styles 350S

350 Spot 350A

350 Asymmetric 350F

350 Flood 400S

350F

400 Spot 400F

3. Light Source 070S

070S

150C

150W CDM-T

250C

250W CDM-T

250C 070HD

70W HQI-TS

150HD

150W HQI-TS 100S

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/ StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/ StreetWise

250H

250W HQI-T

400H

400W HQI-T

150C

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS II

Spot

Glazing: Flat toughened glass

• High-performance flood, spot or asymmetric lighting distributions • Choice of three bracket styles, multiple arm and single or dual bracket options

Asymmetric

• Ideally suited to amenity areas and car park lighting

Bracket options: Bracket Style 1 Bracket Style 2 Bracket Style 3

• All-aluminium construction

Body: High pressure die cast aluminium Luminaire fixing bracket: Steel

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Barosa Bracket Style 3 & Barosa Bracket Style 2 combination shown on 6m Tubular Steel column

Suggested column/ bracket options

Barosa Bracket and Column Combinations

Example

Arm Type – 1st Arm B1

Barosa Bracket Style 1

Barosa Bracket Style 2

Barosa Bracket Style 3 No second arm (1 arm only)

Barosa Bracket Style 1

Barosa Bracket Style 2

Barosa Bracket Style 3

Bracket Style 2

Finish: Polyester powder coated B1

Brackets: Steel Bracket finish: Polyester powder coated

Arm Type – 2nd Arm 0

Seals: Silicone Rubber

Column clamps: High pressure die cast aluminium Column clamps finish: Polyester powder coated B3

Column Mounting Diameter 89

89mm Ø

102

102mm Ø

140

140mm Ø

102

Example Code = B1 B3 102 When ordering Barosa please ensure you order the correct number of luminaires for the arm configuration that you want to achieve

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

ØD

ØC

Flood

Glazing retainer ring: High pressure die cast aluminium

Barosa Bracket Style 2 & Barosa Bracket Style 1 combination shown on 8m Tubular Steel column

Light Distribution

Materials

Barosa 350 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Barosa

Colour: RAL 7004 Signal Grey

Example Code = BAR 350F 150C

Supplied pre-cabled with flexible cable suitable for the column height

Light source: See product codes

Installation and Maintenance

Barosa 400 For mounting at 6 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Optical control: Spot Flood Asymmetric

400 Flood 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/ StreetWise

Options

Dimensions mm

Bracket Style 1

Bracket Style 3

Weight kg

Windage

400

440

415

188

400

0.13m2

350

380

357

166

350

0.10m2

Chippenham Gardens, Brentwood

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Rio

Contemporary

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Rio 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Easy maintenance via stainless steel quick release latch

Rio 450 For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [76mm Ø]

Product Codes 500

450

Example

RI4

RI5

1. Model RI5

2. Mounting S

Side Entry

Direct Entry

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

Glazing: Flat toughened glass

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

4. Light Source

250S*

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L330

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L345

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

150C* 10m

090W 140W

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps see opposite)

Rio IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

C 31/35

• Flat glass option for zero upward light

D 5/25

• Coloured central spill light for enhanced decorative effect • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

LX1 Luminance Optic

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Other: Blue spill light feature Green or white available on request

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS

Materials

No Photocell

Ring: Cast aluminium

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

Entry: Cast aluminium

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Canopy: Spun aluminium U

Spill light: Acrylic cover

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = RI5 S E L330 20 B U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Dimensions mm

DB 703

RAL 9007

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 9006

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

L330

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic

RAL 7016

140W CosmoPolis

RAL 9005

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below

RAL 9016

Rio 450 shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with Gina column bracket

Rio 500 shown on 10m Tapered Steel column with double arm Gina column bracket

Light source: See product codes

A 5/35

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

500

276

750

0.14m2

450

252

675

0.12m2

St. Martin’s Quarter, Worcester

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Manhattan

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model MAN

MAN

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

3. Light Source

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L130

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35 10/10

31/35

5/25

Base has external connector block for ease of maintenance

Mounting: 76mm Ø Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone

Manhattan

Access via removable canopy

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

A 5/35

Light source: See product codes

C 31/35

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

B 10/10

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • All aluminium construction in a sleek, architectural design

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Materials Canopy/brim: Spun aluminium

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS

Base: Cast aluminium

No Photocell

Seals: Neoprene

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = MAN E 090W 81 C PD *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

ØB

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

ØC RAL 9005

PAN 7621 Metallic Silver

RAL 9016

Manhattan shown on Tapered Aluminium 6m column

Manhattan shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with double arm Elegance column bracket

090W

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution A

Installation and Maintenance

Manhattan For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Options

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight Windage kg

810

800

0.19m2

Chester Railway Station

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Toronto

Contemporary

Product Codes Example 1. Model TOR

TOR

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

3. Light Source

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L130

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

31/35

5/25

Suggested column/ bracket options

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone

Access via removable canopy

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

B 10/10

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

C 31/35

• All aluminium construction in a sleek, architectural design

D 5/25

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Materials

No Photocell

Canopy: Spun aluminium

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Base: Cast aluminium

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Seals: Neoprene

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Finish: Polyester powder coated PD

Example Code = TOR E 140W 81 C PD *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

ØB

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

ØC RAL 7016

RAL 9005

10/10

RAL 9016

140W

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS Toronto shown on Tubular Steel 5m column

Toronto shown on Tapered Aluminium 6m column

5/35

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Toronto

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

PAN 7621 Metallic Silver

Base has external connector block for ease of maintenance

Light source: See product codes

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution A

Installation and Maintenance

Toronto For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Options

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

810

360

Weight kg

Windage

0.18m2

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Akord Cone & Akord Bullet

Contemporary

Product Codes Akord Cone A

Akord Cone B

Akord Cone C

Bullet

Example

ACB

ACC

ABU

ACB

Side Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Easy-fit™

1. Model ACA 2. Mounting E

30°Easy-fit™ 4

45°Easy-fit™

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source 050S

050S

070S

150S

150S*

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

250S*

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

400W SON-T+ 035C*

035C*

070C*

150C*

10m

35W CDM-T 70W CDM-T 150W CDM-T

060W

042P

42W PL-T

045W†

45W CosmoPolis

060W†

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 81 7m

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS Akord Cone: All 250W+ models are fitted with high temperature (105°C) photocells as standard N

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Akord Cone & Akord Bullet

Top casting: Cast aluminium Entry: Corrosion protected steel

Akord Cone B For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Akord Cone C & Akord Bullet For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Installation and Maintenance

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

See page 100 for details

Access for Cone A & B via quick release latch

• Flat glass for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available

Access for Cone C & Bullet via quarter turn fasteners

• Choice of entries including unique 30º (Cone) and 45º (Bullet)

Diamond Optic®

Mounting: Easy-fit™ side entry, top entry & angled entry (30º – Cone; 45º – Bullet) Cone A & B: [48.3mm Ø] Cone C & Bullet: [42.4mm Ø]

A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35

D 5/25

Cone

Colours: Top casting: PAN 7621 Metallic Silver Canopy: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

See pages 28 – 31 for details

LX1 Luminance Optic

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LX1 Luminance Optic (Cone A & B) Other: A range of dedicated brackets are available for Akord Cone & Akord Bullet

Distribution optimised for main road lighting. See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

See page 280

No Photocell

Bullet

Cone

Example Code = ACB E E 150S 81 C PD *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control † Supplied with remote gear

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

Dimensions mm RAL 7037

RAL 7016

PAN 7621 Metallic Silver

RAL 9005

RAL 9016

Akord Bullet shown on Tubular Steel 5m column with CD column bracket

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic Akord Cone A shown on Tapered Steel 8m column with DA column bracket

Canopy: Spun aluminium

Light source: See product codes

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

400S*

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

100S

Materials

Akord Cone A For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Glazing: Flat toughened glass

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Options

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Bullet

Weight kg

Windage

Cone A

600

675

0.21m2

Cone B

560

630

0.18m2

Cone C

385

420

0.09m2

Bullet

310

430

0.10m2

Orchard Theatre, Dartford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Contemporary

Forza

Product Codes Example 1. Model FOR

FOR

2. Height 1

Root

Flange

Installation and Maintenance

Forza 1 5.0m

Access to lamp via flat glass glazing

Forza 2 7.0m

Door for cable entry

Optical Distribution

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

060W

5. Optional LED Path Light Y

LED Array

No Path Light

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below DB 703 – Textured Metallic Dark Grey*

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Forza

Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting

• Contemporary style light stack, with slim profile and integral optics

Gear, switching and control: Miniature photocell available Electronic control gear

• With performance micro road lighting optic • Optional secondary window for LED pathway lighting

Optical control: Miniature dichroic glass optic

Materials:

7. Switching, Dimming and Control

IP66 | IK10 | CLASS I

Light source: See product codes

4. Light Source

Options

Forza 3 9.0m

3. Mounting

Column: Galvanised steel Glazing: Flat glass

Example Code = FOR 2 R 060W Y DB N *For an alternative colour, replace DB with the two digit number of the colour you require

Finish: Two-pack acrylic wet spray-paint finish

7m ØB 6m

Forza 3 27

Dimensions mm DB 703

RAL 9007

RAL 9006

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

RAL 9005

Forza 1

Forza 2

RAL 9016

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

5000

245

4500

135

7000

245

6400

190

9000

245

8500

245

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Classic

Timeless simplicity

Classic

Incorporating the Optima series

Understated design with minimal decorative detail

Stratum

Excel

Dover

92 – 93

94 – 95

96 – 97

Polar

Cradle

98 – 99

Technical Details (Optima Series) 100 – 101

Cradle Grants Quay, London

Crieff

Corvus

102 – 103

104 – 105

Contemporary with minimal decorative detail, our simply styled Classic range of luminaires incorporates our popular and established Optima series. Constructed from robust and durable materials, its understated and harmonious design, based around a precision die cast aluminium ring, is complementary to road or car park lighting, in residential, retail, leisure or business developments. Performance can be enhanced with stand-alone or centrally managed dimming and switching systems and the most up to date light sources, including LED, Philips CosmoPolis and GE StreetWise. Control options include our patented Diamond Optic® reflector and newly available LX1 Luminance Optic, for optimal main road lighting.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Classic

Product Codes 500

450

Example

ST4

1. Model ST5

2. Mounting D

Direct Entry

Side Entry

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

Polycarbonate Bowl

Flat Toughened Glass

3. Glazing F

4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

5. Light Source 050S 070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

250S

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

400S*

400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted)

150C* 10m

045W

45W CosmoPolis 60W CosmoPolis 90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L330

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L345

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy

L245

7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)

8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = ST4 D F E L245 20 A U * These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches which retain glazing

400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100

Stratum 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

See page 100 for details

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33)

B 10/10

• Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available C 31/35

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Light source: See product codes

LX1 Luminance Optic

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy

Stratum

Top entry version available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only Zebra crossing version available

See pages 298 – 301 for details

Materials Ring: Die cast aluminium Canopy: Spun aluminium Direct/Side Entry: Die cast aluminium

ØB

Top Entry: Corrosion protected steel Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches Seals: Silicone rubber

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Finish: Polyester powder coated Dimensions mm ØB Stratum A B

RAL 6005

57W PL-T

RAL 5003

42W PL-T

057P*

RAL 9007

150W CDM-T

042P

PAN 7621

150C*

060W

RAL 7037

70W CDM-T

090W

RAL 7016

35W CDM-T

070C*

090W

RAL 9005

Stratum 450 shown on Tubular Steel 5m column

Stratum 500 gearbox version shown on Tubular Steel 10m column with Linear column bracket

035C*

Installation and Maintenance

Stratum 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

100S

Options

Stratum

Classic

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Flat glass

Windage

500

320

550

14.6

0.13m2

500•

215

550

16.1

0.10m2

450

285

500

13.2

0.11m2

450•

202

500

13.7

0.09m2

•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100

Elmer Approach, Southend

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Classic

Product Codes 500

450

Example

EX4

EX5

1. Model EX5

2. Mounting D

Direct Entry

Side Entry

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

Polycarbonate Bowl

Flat Toughened Glass

3. Glazing F

4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

250S

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

400S*

400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted) 035C*

150C*

10m

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis 90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L330

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L345

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)

Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches which retain glazing

400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100

Excel 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)

L345 20

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

See page 100 for details

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32– 33)

B 10/10

• Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available C 31/35

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Light source: See product codes

LX1 Luminance Optic

Excel

Top entry versions available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only Zebra crossing version available

See pages 298 – 301 for details

8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Materials Ring: Die cast aluminium

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

Direct/Side Entry: Die cast aluminium

CMS Harvard LeafNut

Top Entry: Corrosion protected steel

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches

CMS Zodion Vizion

Seals: Silicone rubber

Example Code = EX5 D F E L345 20 A U

Canopy: Spun aluminium

ØB

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Flat glass

* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Dimensions ØB mm

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

Excel RAL 9007

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

PAN 7621

Suggested column/ bracket options

RAL 7037

042P

090W

RAL 7016

70W CDM-T 150W CDM-T

090W

RAL 9005

Excel 450 shown on Magna 6m column with Genus column bracket

Excel 500 shown on Tubular Steel 8m column with Maya column bracket

070C*

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below

35W CDM-T

150C*

Installation and Maintenance

Excel 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl

5. Light Source 050S

Options

Excel

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

500

388

550

14.6

0.16m2

500•

265

550

16.1

0.11m2

450

354

500

13.2

0.14m2

450•

235

500

13.7

0.10m2

•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100

Christchurch, New Zealand

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Classic

Product Codes 500

450

Example

DO4

DO5

1. Model DO5

2. Mounting D

Direct Entry

Side Entry

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

Polycarbonate Bowl

Flat Toughened Glass

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only 50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

250S

F E

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl

400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted) 035C*

150C*

10m

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis 60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L330

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L345

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey

RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy 5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)

Light source: See product codes

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

L330

Dover

Top entry version available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

See page 100 for details

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33)

B 10/10

• Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available C 31/35

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

LX1 Luminance Optic

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only Zebra crossing version available

See pages 298 – 301 for details

8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Materials Ring: Die cast aluminium

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

Direct/Side Entry: Die cast aluminium

CMS Harvard LeafNut

Top Entry: Corrosion protected steel

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches

CMS Zodion Vizion

Seals: Silicone rubber

Example Code = DO5 S F E L330 27 C U

Canopy: Spun aluminium ØB

Finish: Polyester powder coated

With bowl

* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Dimensions mm

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

Dover RAL 9007

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

PAN 7621

Suggested column/ bracket options

RAL 7037

042P

060W

RAL 7016

70W CDM-T 150W CDM-T

090W

RAL 9005

070C* 150C*

7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic

Dover 450 shown on Tapered Steel 6m column with double arm Linear column bracket and optional Spike finial

Dover 500 shown on Tubular Steel 8m column with Linear column bracket

35W CDM-T

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

400S*

400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100

Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] (450 version) Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] (450 version)

5. Light Source 050S

Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches which retain glazing

Dover 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Installation and Maintenance

3. Glazing

Options Dover 500 For mounting at 8 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Dover

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

BØB

500

354

760

16.2

0.17m2

500•

245

760

17.1

0.13m2

450

318

690

14.7

0.13m2

450•

229

690

15.2

0.10m2

•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100

Edge Lane, Liverpool

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Classic

Product Codes Polar 500

Polar 450

Cradle 450

Example

PO4

CR4

PO4

1. Model PO5

2. Mounting D

Direct Entry

Side Entry

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

3. Glazing P

Polycarbonate Bowl

Flat Toughened Glass

4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources Electronic Gear: E E E available for most light sources M M M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

F E

5. Light Source 050S

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

250S 035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

150C*

140W CosmoPolis 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – L230 L230 L230 Warm White 3000K 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – L245 L245 L245 Neutral White 4500K 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – L330 L330 L330 Warm White 3000K 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – L345 L345 L345 Neutral White 4500K 6. Colour – for alternative colours see below

RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy

5/35

10/10

31/35

Mounting: Polar Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)

L345 20

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only Zebra crossing version available (Polar) See pages 298 – 301 for details

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Ring: Die cast aluminium

Part Night Dim

Canopy: Spun aluminium

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

Direct/Side Entry (Polar): Die cast aluminium

CMS Zodion Vizion

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

B 10/10

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions C 31/35

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33)

D 5/25

• Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available (Polar) Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

LX1 Luminance Optic

Polar

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 –35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Cradle

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic (Polar)

* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

See page 100 for details

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

Example Code = PO4 S F E L345 20 A U

Top entry versions available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment

Light source: See product codes

5/25 LX1 Luminance Optic L L (selected lamps – see opposite) 8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS

RAL 6005

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 5003

Suggested column/ bracket options

RAL 9007

PAN 7621

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

RAL 9005

Polar 450 & Cradle 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic Cradle 450 (Flat glass option) shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with double arm Genus column bracket

Polar 500 shown on Cardiff 8m column with Genus column bracket

400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100

Polar & Cradle

ØB

Materials

Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches which retain glazing

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl

400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted) 035C*

Installation and Maintenance

Polar 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Cradle 76mm Ø

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

400S*

Options

Polar & Cradle

ØB

ØC

Top Entry (Polar): Corrosion protected steel

Dimensions mm

Weight Windage kg

Entry (Cradle): Metal sprayed steel

Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches

Polar 500

500 550

14.6

0.21m2

Polar 500•

305 550

16.1

0.14m2

Seals: Silicone rubber

Polar 450

450 500

13.2

0.17m2

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Polar 450*

280 500

13.7

0.12m2

Cradle 450

590 590 76

18.0

0.20m2

Cradle 450• 590 590 76

18.9

0.15m2

•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100

Polar with bowl

Grants Quay, London

Cradle with flat glass

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

100 Classic

Classic 101

Technical Details

Entry Types These four entry types apply to Stratum, Excel, Dover and Polar. Cradle and Crieff are available as post-mounted products only and Corvus has top entry options.

Optima Series

Direct Entry For luminaires to be fitted directly to columns. B A

A (Dover)

450

643

738

336

500

693

798

355

Direct Entry

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Side Entry

For use with columns and wall brackets.

Dover B A

A (Dover)

450

620

715

377

500

670

775

395

Side Entry

Direct/Side Entry 400W Gearbox For housing 250W electronic gear or 400W magnetic gear (Dover, Stratum, Excel and Polar). Available as side entry or direct entry.

Direct/Side Entry 400W Gearbox

925

650

Stratum

Excel

Polar

Cradle

A 500

Top Entry For suspension from pendant brackets, canopies and ceilings. Two versions are offered; the Easy-fit™ for ease of installation and luminaire alignment, and the standard BSP threaded.

Easy-fit™ The Easy-fit™entry, which is our own design, both simplifies luminaire alignment and eliminates the problem of twisted cabling associated with threaded entries. This is compatible with most of our wall and column brackets.

Threaded The threaded entry is the conventional method of mounting the luminaire and is compatible with most new and existing bracket types.

Ropetackle, Shoreham-by-Sea

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

102 Classic

Classic 103

Crieff

Product Codes Example 1. Model CRF

Polycarbonate Bowl

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl

4. Light Source

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green

5/35

Canopy: Spun aluminium

10/10

31/35

5/25

Suggested column/ bracket options

B 10/10

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Easy Installation and Maintenance

C 31/35

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Entry: Galvanised steel C

Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = CRF P E 090W 27 C C

ØB

* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 9007

PAN 7621

RAL 7037 21

ØC

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

ØB Dimensions mm

ØB Weight Windage kg

690

700

16.3

RAL 7016

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 9005

Crieff shown on Tapered Aluminium 5m column

Crieff shown on Tubular Steel 6m column with double arm Roco column bracket

A 5/35

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Materials Ring: Die cast aluminium

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

6. Diamond Optic Setting/LED Array Distribution

7. Switching, Dimming & Control 4m

Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Crieff

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

090W

RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS) Light source: See product codes

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 7m

Base has external connector block for ease of installation

Mounting: 76mm Ø

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Installation and Maintenance

Crieff For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

CRF

2. Glazing P

Options

0.23m2

Lyng Lang Homezone, Birmingham

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

104 Classic

Classic 105

Product Codes B

Example

COB

COA

1. Model COA

2. Mounting E

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

Polycarbonate Bowl

Flat Toughened Glass

4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

070C* 150C*

10m

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green

140W CosmoPolis

L330

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L345

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L330

PAN 7621 Metallic Silver

7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic

Suggested column/ bracket options

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

Canopy: Spun aluminium

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)

Top entry versions available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

See page 100 for details

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35

D 5/25

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Flat glass option for zero upward light • NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available

Entry: Corrosion protected steel

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

LX1 Luminance Optic

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Materials C

8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Ring: Die cast aluminium

Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches Seals: Silicone rubber

Finish: Polyester powder coated ØB

ØB

Example Code = COA E F E L330 81 C U * These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Dimensions mm

A A•

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 9007

Corvus PAN 7621

45W CosmoPolis

060W

RAL 7037

045W 060W

RAL 7016

57W PL-T

RAL 9005

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Corvus B (Flat glass option) shown on Amax 6m column with Arc column bracket

Corvus A shown on Tubular Steel 8m column with Inverted Genus column bracket

42W PL-T

057P*

140W

042P

057P*

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl

Corvus

Light source: See product codes

150W CDM-T

042P

Corvus B For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

5. Light Source 070S

Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1¼” BSP]

3. Glazing

Installation and Maintenance

Corvus A For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Options

Corvus

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

870

681

17.3

0.24m2

686

681

17.8

0.18m2

710

612

13.3

0.17m2

B•

636

612

13.9

0.15m2

•with flat glass

Bowl version

Windage

Ravenswood, Ipswich

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Traditional 107

Traditional Attention to detail

Crafted from copper or aluminium to ensure longevity

LED Light Engine

Windsor

Lancaster

Knightsbridge

Westminster

110 – 111

112 – 113

114 – 115

116 – 117

108 – 109

Period styling is at the heart of this range of luminaires, spanning from traditional heritage lanterns with authentic detailing and ornate brackets to luminaires from more recent times. Crafted from copper or aluminium to ensure longevity and with a selection of harmonious columns and brackets (see page 256), the Traditional range is complementary to a wide range of building styles and environments and thus a popular choice for residential developments and town centres.

Pall Mall

Portland

Berkeley

Strand

Ely

116 – 117

118 – 119

120 – 123

124 – 127

Strand/Ely Technical

Iffley

Hatfield

York

Warwick

130 – 131

132 – 133

134 – 135

Salisbury

Newport

Braemar

Waterford

Henley

136 – 137

138 – 139

140 – 141

Specified for their performance or simply for their timeless design, this collection now benefits from up-to-date technologies, including LED, with energysaving options available through central management system compatibility and our high performance Diamond Optic® or LX1 Luminance Optic.

128 – 129

Ely Ingress Park, Dartford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

108 Traditional

LED Light Engine

Traditional 109

Whether your driver for specifying LED is energy savings, reducing maintenance costs or simply a desire to employ the very latest technology, your product design choice may, up until now, have been restricted to contemporary style luminaires.

Traditional lanterns

Designed to fit effortlessly within the majority of our exterior lighting luminaires including the Traditional range shown in the following pages, the LED Light Engine is available in new luminaires or as a retrofit option for installation in DW Windsor products up to ten years of age.

Available new only

For full technical details on LED Light Engine, please refer to pages 32 – 33.

Available for new or retrofit Windsor, Strand, Ely, Iffley

Lancaster, Knightsbridge, Pall Mall, Westminster, Hatfield, York, Warwick, Newport, Salisbury, Waterford, Braemar, Henley

LED Light Engine

Other lanterns Available for new or retrofit Rio, Stratum, Excel, Dover, Polar, Cradle, Crieff, Corvus, DW400 Available new only Milano LED, Evora LED

Key advantages • LED Light Engine gives you the option to specify LED as a light source • Now available for Traditional lanterns • Available as retrofit LED solution for existing DW Windsor schemes • Available in brand new products (see opposite for ranges) • Significant energy savings and reduced maintenance costs • Equivalent distribution to Diamond Optic® A, B, C & D • Multi-layer LED Light Engine

Ponsonby Place, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

110 Traditional

Windsor

Traditional 111

Product Codes Street

Avenue

Example

WIA

WIS

1. Model WIS

2. Mounting F

Frog

Cast Base

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K RAL 9005 Black

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

10 A

Mounting: Traditional frog (standard) Cast base (Windsor Street only) [76mm Ø]

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

Windsor IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

B 10/10

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • Corrosion resistant, copper construction

C 31/35

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish

NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish

Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Materials Body: Copper Standard frog: Metal sprayed steel Cast base: Cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper

Example Code = WIS F E L230 10 A U

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

ØC

Polished & lacquered copper

Natural copper

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 9005

Windsor Avenue shown on Ornate Cast wall box bracket

Windsor Street shown on Oxford 4m column

L230

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

Tool-less maintenance via hinged, sealed canopy with retaining stay and slide latches

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

L230

Windsor Avenue For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Light source: See product codes

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Frog and cast base have external connector blocks for ease of installation

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

150W CDM-T

042P

Installation and Maintenance

Windsor Street For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl Acrylic one piece bowl (on request) Toughened flat glass (on request)

4. Light Source 050S

Options

Dimensions mm Windsor This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg C

Street

833 440

188 10.3

0.28m2

Avenue

745

119 8.3

0.22m2

390

Optional cast base

Windage

Windsor LED St Paul’s Churchyard, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

112 Traditional

Lancaster

Traditional 113

Product Codes Example 1. Model LAS

LAS

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

3. Light Source

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/SteetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L245 10

Suggested column/ bracket options

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish

NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish

5/35

Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish

10/10

31/35

5/25

Tool-less maintenance via hinged, sealed canopy with retaining stay and slide latches

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

B 10/10

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • Corrosion resistant, copper construction C 31/35

D 5/25

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Body: Copper

Part Night Dim

Spigot plate: Metal sprayed steel

CMS Harvard LeafNut

Seals: Silicone rubber

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper

CMS Zodion Vizion

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Materials

Example Code = LAS E L245 10 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Polished & lacquered copper

Natural copper

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece bowl

Lancaster

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

RAL 9005 Black

RAL 7016

Mounting: Steel spigot plate [76mm Ø]

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

RAL 9005

Spigot has external connector block for ease of installation

Light source: See product codes

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS Lancaster shown on Plain Cast wall bracket

Lancaster shown on Newcastle 5m column with optional ladder bars

Installation and Maintenance

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10

Options Lancaster For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

ØC Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

725

410

Weight kg

Windage

12.5

0.22m2

Hertford County Hospital

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

114 Traditional

Knightsbridge

Traditional 115

Product Codes Street

Avenue

Example

KNA

KNS

1. Model KNS

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S 035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

150C*

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

RAL 9005 Black

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

Tool-less maintenance via hinged, sealed canopy with retaining stay and slide latches

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

A 5/35

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

B 10/10

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • Corrosion resistant, copper construction C 31/35

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details For Knightsbridge Avenue only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish

Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

Body: Copper

CMS Telensa PLANet

Frog: Metal sprayed steel

CMS Zodion Vizion

Seals: Silicone rubber

Example Code = KNS E 090W 10 A N *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Materials

Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

ØC

Polished & lacquered copper

Natural copper

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

AC. B

RAL 9005

Knightsbridge Street shown on Ornate Cast wall bracket

Knightsbridge Street shown on Oxford 5m column

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

090W

Knightsbridge

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Light source: See product codes

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Knightsbridge Avenue For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

150W CDM-T

042P

Frog has external connector block for ease of installation

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece bowl

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

Installation and Maintenance

Knightsbridge Street For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: Traditional frog [76mm Ø]

3. Light Source 050S

Options

Dimensions mm Knightsbridge This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight Windage kg

Street

890

610

105 12.5

D 0.32m2

Avenue

741

510

110

0.28m2

10.5

Oamaru, New Zealand

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

116 Traditional

Product Codes Westminster

Pall Mall

Example

PAL

1. Model WES

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

3. Light Source

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

Suggested column/ bracket options

Westminster & Pall Mall

Access is via the removable canopy

Mounting: Traditional frog [76mm Ø]

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece glazing cone (standard) Acrylic one piece glazing cone

A 5/35

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

B 10/10

C 31/35

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

D 5/25

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • Corrosion resistant, copper construction

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish

Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish

Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS Pall Mall shown on Norwich 4m column

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = PAL M 070S 10 A C *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Westminster

Pall Mall

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Materials Body: Copper Coronet (Westminster): Aluminium (painted) Frog: Metal sprayed steel Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper

Westminster

Pall Mall

ØB

Polished & lacquered copper

Natural copper

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 9005

Westminster shown on Cambridge 5m column

RAL 9005 Black

Frog has external connector block for ease of installation

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

Installation and Maintenance

Westminster & Pall Mall For mounting at 4 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Light source: See product codes

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below

070S

Options

Westminster & Pall Mall

Traditional 117

ØC

Ø Dimensions mm A This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg C

Windage

Westminster

787 420

115 10.5

0.20m2

Pall Mall

787

115 10.2

0.20m2

397

Copper – polished & lacquered

Westminster Shepherds Market, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

118 Traditional

Portland & Berkeley

Traditional 119

Product Codes Portland

Berkeley

Example

BER

1. Model POR 2. Mounting E

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

10 A

Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP] (standard)

See pages 128 – 129 for details

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece glazing bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece glazing bowl

Portland & Berkeley

Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches

Diamond Optic® A 5/35

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Corrosion resistant, copper construction C 31/35

D 5/25

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish

Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position See pages 28 – 31 for details

NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish

Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = BER T M 100S 10 A PS

Optical control: Diamond Optic® Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Berkeley

Materials Body: Copper Coronet (Berkeley): Aluminium (painted) Entry: Corrosion protected steel Access: Body coloured, stainless steel latches Seals: Silicone rubber

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Portland

Berkeley

ØB

Copper – polished and lacquered option

Polished & lacquered copper

Natural copper

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

Portland

RAL 7016

A B

RAL 9005

Berkeley shown on Chester 5m column with double arm Cast Ornate column bracket

RAL 9005 Black

6. Diamond Optic® Setting Portland shown on Cardiff 6m column with Hoop column bracket

Installation and Maintenance

Portland & Berkeley For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Light source: See product codes

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below

100S

Options

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

Portland

600

397

7.6

0.17m2

Berkeley

600

428

7.9

0.17m2

Portland New Broad Street, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

120 Traditional

Strand A & A Plus

Traditional 121

Product Codes A

A Plus

Example

1. Model STA

STP

Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim)

STA E

2. Mounting E

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources**

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source 100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

250S 10m

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Suggested column/ bracket options

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L345

36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

RAL 9005 Black

140W

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)

Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment

Strand A Plus For mounting at 10 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

See pages 128 – 129 for details

10 A

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] (Strand A) Easy-fit™ entry [48mm Ø] (Strand A Plus) Threaded entry [1¼” BSP]

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

C 31/35

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)

D 5/25

• New LX1 Luminance Optic available

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

• The Strand is available in four proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

LX1 Luminance Optic

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

See pages 128 – 129 for details

CMS Telensa PLANet

Zebra crossing version (Strand A)

CMS Zodion Vizion

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control **400W gear is magnetic only, 250W gear in Strand A is magnetic only

A 5/35

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

See pages 128 – 129 for details

Example Code = STA E E 140W 10 A CH

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See page 34 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is only available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic

Strand A & A Plus

Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches

Light source: See product codes

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/ LX1 Luminance Optic A

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) Narrow brim (Strand A)

See pages 298 – 301 for details

Materials Body: Spun aluminium Entry: Corrosion protected steel

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches Seals: Silicone rubber

ØB

Finish: Polyester powder coated

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

Dimensions mm RAL 5003

L330

Installation and Maintenance

Strand A For mounting at 7 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard) Polycarbonate round bowl (Strand A only)

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below

RAL 7037

400W SON-T+

090W

RAL 7016

400S*

150W CDM-T

RAL 9005

Strand A shown on Edinburgh 8m column with Traditional Scroll column bracket

Strand A Plus shown on Chester 10m column with special Arc column bracket

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150C*

250S

Options

B•

643

670

527

A Plus

870

900

Strand

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

•Narrow Brim (Strand A only)

Weight kg

Windage

11.5

0.19m2

18.0

0.35m2 Knightsbridge, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

122 Traditional

Strand B & C

Traditional 123

Product Codes B

Example

1. Model STB

STC

Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim)

STB

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

Square U Bracket

2. Mounting

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light source E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

150C*

150W CDM-T

057P*

57W PL-T 045W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis 12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Light source: See product codes

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

L230

RAL 9005 Black

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red

A 5/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

B 10/10

C 31/35

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • The Strand is available in four proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments

D 5/25

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Strand C only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

Narrow brim

See pages 128 – 129 for details

Zebra crossing version

See pages 298 – 301 for details

Part Night Dim

Materials

CMS Harvard LeafNut

Body: Spun aluminium

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

Entry: Corrosion protected steel

CMS Zodion Vizion

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control **45W CosmoPolis in Strand C is not compatible with Telensa or Mayflower CMS

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Example Code = STB E E L230 10 D C

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated ØB

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

Dimensions mm RAL 7037

L130 L230

RAL 7016

45W CosmoPolis**

060W

Strand B & C

Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches

See pages 128 – 129 for details

RAL 9005

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP] Post top “U” brackets

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Strand B with Square U bracket on Newcastle 5m column with optional ladder bars

Strand B shown on Cardiff 6m column with Traditional Hoop column bracket

See pages 128-129 for details

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

Strand C For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

150S

045W

50W SON-T+/StreetWise 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment

100S

070C*

050S 070S

Installation and Maintenance

Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard) Polycarbonate round bowl (Strand B only)

4. Light Source 070S

Options Strand B For mounting at 4 – 7 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Windage

B•

575

585

484

8.5

0.15m2

498 480

396

5.5

0.11m2

Strand

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

•Narrow Brim

Poundbury, Dorset

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

124 Traditional

Product Codes A

ELB

ELC

Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim)

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

Tear Drop U Bracket

Example

1. Model ELA

ELB

2. Mounting E

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light source E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

070S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

250S 070C* 150C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C* 042P 057P* 045W

090W

60W CosmoPolis 90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis L130

L145 L230

L245

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K 12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L245

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

10/10

31/35

See pages 128 – 129 for details

5/25

Zebra crossing version available

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details For Ely C only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See page 34 for details The LX1 Luminance Optic is only available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

See pages 298 – 301 for details

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N

• The Ely is available in three proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments

D 5/25

Narrow brim

LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite) N

C 31/35

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Materials Body: Spun aluminium ØB

Entry: Corrosion protected steel PD

Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = ELB T E L245 10 A PD *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control **45W CosmoPolis in Ely is not compatible with Telensa or Mayflower CMS

Dimensions mm Ely

RAL 3005

Suggested column/ bracket options

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic (Ely A only)

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) • New LX1 Luminance Optic available (Ely A only)

Ely A only

5/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

B 10/10

LX1 Luminance Optic

RAL 6005

RAL 9005 Black

A 5/35

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red

RAL 7037

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

RAL 7016

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/ LX1 Luminance Optic

RAL 9005

Ely C shown on Cardiff 5m column with Swan Neck column bracket

Ely A shown on Edinburgh 8m column with Traditional Hoop column bracket

RAL 5003

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø]

Light source: See product codes

45W CosmoPolis**

060W

Ely C For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

42W PL-T

090W

See pages 128 – 129 for details

Ely

Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard)

57W PL-T 045W

Ely B For mounting at 4 – 7 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

See pages 128 – 129 for details

150W CDM-T 042P

Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment

Post top “U” brackets

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 035C*

Installation and Maintenance

Ely A For mounting at 7 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Threaded entry: Ely A [1¼” BSP] Ely B/C [1” BSP]

4. Light Source 050S

Options

Ely

Traditional 125

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

B•

638

670

527

11.5

0.17m2

575

585

484

8.5

0.14m2

489

480

396

5.5

0.10m2

•Narrow Brim

Ingress Park, Dartford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

126 Traditional

Ely Ingress Park, Dartford

Traditional 127

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

128 Traditional

Traditional 129

Strand & Ely

Entry Types Top Entry

Square U

Strand Dimensions

Technical Details

The Strand and Ely Ranges are offered with either a threaded entry or our Easy-fit™ entry. Easy-fit™

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I Tear Drop U

Glazing & Brim Options The Easy-fit™ entry, which is our own design, both simplifies luminaire alignment and eliminates the problem of twisted cabling associated with threaded entries. This is compatible with most of our wall and column brackets.

Dimensions mm

Round U

Threaded

Weight kg

Windage

Brim Options

Glazing Options

“U” Bracket Options

Zebra Version

Available

B•

Strand A Plus

870 900

18.0

0.35m2

Wide

Tear Drop

Strand A

643 670 527

11.5

0.19m2

Wide/Narrow

Tear Drop/Round

Strand B

575 585 484

8.5

0.15m2

Wide/Narrow

Tear Drop/Round

Square/Tear Drop/Round

Strand C

498 480 396

5.5

0.11m2

Wide/Narrow

Tear Drop

Square/Tear Drop

Available

•Narrow Brim

The threaded entry is the conventional method of mounting the luminaire and is compatible with most new and existing bracket types.

Square U

For the Ely there are two different styles of “U” bracket; a traditional square design and a design that closely follows the shape of the tear drop glazing.

Strand round glazing: narrow brim

Ely tear drop glazing: wide brim

Ely tear drop glazing: narrow brim

Tear Drop U

ØB

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

ØB

Windage

Brim Options

Glazing Options

“U” Bracket Options

Zebra Version

Available

B•

Ely A

638

670

527

11.5

0.17m2

Wide/Narrow

Tear Drop

Ely B

576

585

484

8.5

0.14m2

Wide/Narrow

Tear Drop

Square/Tear Drop

Ely C

489

480

396

5.5

0.10m2

Wide/Narrow

Tear Drop

Square/Tear Drop

Available

•Narrow Brim

The “U” bracket options are unaffected by the brim type i.e. any “U” bracket shape can be used with either brim type.“U” brackets are made in steel, galvanised, polyester powder coated in the colour of the lantern and supplied pre-assembled to the lantern. Wiring is made simple by having a terminal block mounted within the base of the“U” bracket.

Strand round glazing: wide brim

“U” Bracket Entry

For the Strand there are three different styles of “U” bracket; a traditional square design (for either the tear drop or round glazing bowl) and two designs that closely follow the shape of either the round or tear drop glazing.

Strand tear drop glazing: narrow brim

Ely Dimensions

“U” Bracket Entry “U” brackets allow the Strand and Ely (B and C sizes) to be mounted as post top luminaires.

Strand tear drop glazing: wide brim

Strand Poundbury, Dorset

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

130 Traditional

Iffley

Traditional 131

Product Codes Example 1. Model IFF

IFF

2. Mounting E

Top Entry Easy-fit™

Top Entry Threaded

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for most light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S**

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

L130

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

Installation and Maintenance

Iffley For mounting at 2.5 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP]

See pages 128 – 129 for details

Glazing: Polycarbonate curved glazing bowl (standard) Polycarbonate straight glazing bowl

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

B 10/10

Light source: See product codes

C 31/35

D 5/25

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Entry: Corrosion protected steel

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches

CMS Zodion Vizion

Seals: Silicone rubber

Example Code = IFF T E 042P 10 B U

Iffley

Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches

A 5/35

Materials U

Body: Spun aluminium

Finish: Polyester powder coated

*Not available with dimming or CMS **Supplied with gear tray for remote mounting

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Dimensions mm

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

ØB

RAL 9005

Iffley shown on Oxford 4m column with Iffley Swan Neck column bracket

Iffley shown on Tubular Steel 5m column with standard Swan Neck column bracket

RAL 9005 Black

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

042P

Options

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

A•

320

378

324

•Straight glazing

Weight kg

Windage

4.9

0.09m2

Straight glazing bowl

Madley Park, Witney

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

132 Traditional

Hatfield

Traditional 133

Product Codes Example 1. Model HAB

HAB

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

3. Light Source

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Hatfield shown on Large Plain Cast wall bracket

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

CMS Zodion Vizion

Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Glazing: Polycarbonate glazing cone

A 5/35

Hatfield IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options • Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

C 31/35

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)

D 5/25

Light source: See product codes

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Materials Canopy: Spun aluminium Body: Fabricated aluminium Frog: Metal sprayed steel Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = HAB E 042P 10 C C *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

ØC

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

ØB

RAL 9005

Hatfield shown on Cardiff 6m column

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

042P

RAL 9005 Black

Installation and Maintenance

Hatfield For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below

Options

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

1007

585

Weight kg

Windage

10.5

0.19m2

Heaton Grange, Bolton

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

134 Traditional

Traditional 135

York & Warwick

Product Codes York

Warwick

Example

WAR

YOK

1. Model YOK

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

050S

50W SON-T/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L130

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Suggested column/ bracket options

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

140W

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red

Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options C 31/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

D 5/25

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)

No Photocell

Coronet painted gold (Warwick only)

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Materials

Part Night Switch Off

Canopy: Spun aluminium

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Zodion Vizion

York

Warwick

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Example Code = YOK E 140W 10 C CH

York & Warwick

Light source: See product codes

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

Coronet: Aluminium Base: Cast aluminium Seals: Neoprene Finish: Polyester powder coated

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Warwick

ØB

York

ØC

Dimensions mm

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

ØC RAL 9005

York shown on Chester 4m column

Warwick shown on Ornate Cast wall bracket

RAL 9005 Black

Warwick For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10

Installation and Maintenance

York For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø

3. Light Source 050S

Options

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

York

778

323

9.4

0.14m2

Warwick

778

345

9.4

0.15m2

York Luss, Banks of Loch Lomond

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

136 Traditional

Traditional 137

Salisbury & Newport

Product Codes Salisbury

Newport

Example

NEW

1. Model SAL

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

6m Newport shown on Cardiff 5m column with optional ladder bars

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L130

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Suggested column/ bracket options

RAL 9005 Black

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation

Newport For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

060W

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red

Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options C 31/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

D 5/25

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109) Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

Salisbury

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Newport

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Canopy: Spun aluminium

Part Night Switch Off

Base: Cast aluminium

Part Night Dim

Seals: Neoprene

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Zodion Vizion

Salisbury & Newport

Light source: See product codes

Materials

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = NEW E 060W 10 C C *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Newport

ØB

Salisbury

ØC

Dimensions mm

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

ØC RAL 9005

Salisbury shown on York pedestal

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below

050S

070S

Installation and Maintenance

Salisbury For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø

3. Light Source 050S

Options

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

Salisbury

778

500

9.4

0.16m2

Newport

778

365

9.4

0.15m2

Salisbury Linlithgow Street, West Lothian

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

138 Traditional

Braemar & Waterford

Traditional 139

Product Codes Braemar

Waterford

Example

WAT

1. Model BRA

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L130

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Waterford shown on Neva wall bracket

Suggested column/ bracket options

10/10

31/35

5/25

Braemar & Waterford

Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options C 31/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

D 5/25

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)

Light source: See product codes 140W

5/35

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red

Braemar

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Waterford

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Base: Cast aluminium

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

Seals: Neoprene

CMS Zodion Vizion

Materials U

Canopy: Spun aluminium

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = WAT E 140W 10 C U *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Braemar

Waterford ØB

ØB

ØC Dimensions mm

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

ØC

RAL 9005

Braemar shown on Chester 5m column

RAL 9005 Black

Waterford For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation

Glazing: Medium clear polycarbonate glazing cone

4. Colour– for alternative colours see below 10

Installation and Maintenance

Braemar For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø

3. Light Source 070S

Options

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Windage

Braemar

652

365

9.4

0.14m2

Waterford

652

450

9.4

0.15m2

Braemar Kingsmead, Milton Keynes

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

140 Traditional

Henley

Traditional 141

Product Codes Example 1. Model HEN

HEN

2. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

3. Light Source

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C*

70W CDM-T

150C*

150W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

L130

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L145

12 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

Suggested column/ bracket options

31/35

045W

5/25

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone

Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution A 5/35

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

B 10/10

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions • Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 108 – 109)

C 31/35

D 5/25

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) D

6. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Zodion Vizion

Materials Canopy: Spun aluminium Base: Cast aluminium Seals: Neoprene Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = HEN E 045W 10 D C *These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

ØB

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

ØC RAL 7016

10/10

RAL 9005

Henley shown on Linear wall bracket

Henley shown on Cardiff 4m column with optional ladder bars

5/35

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Henley

For information on LED Light Engine see pages 108 – 109

RAL 9005 Black

Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation

Light source: See product codes

5. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

Installation and Maintenance

Henley For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

4. Colour– for alternative colours see below 10

Options

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

645

314

Weight kg

Windage

9.4

0.14m2

Royal Clarence Yard, Gosport

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Functional

143

Functional

Reliable, established performance

DW400 Cribbs Causeway, Bristol

Certification to ISO 9001:2008 reflects the integrity of our rigorous quality management systems

Road Lantern

DW400

Meridian

Toro

144 – 145

146 – 147

148 – 149

150 – 151

An established range of products offering a practical lighting solution across a breadth of applications. The performance of each is designed to suit its function, whether lighting residential developments, traffic junctions or pedestrian walkways. Energy efficiency is achieved using photocell switching or electronic controls compatible with most Central Management Systems. Flat glass options and obtrusive light shields prevent unwanted light spill, while options for mounting and on-site adjustment allow flexibility.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

144

Functional

• New range of luminaires for road lighting • Suitable for lamps ranging from 50W to 400W

Functional

Road Lantern

• Designed to offer great value for money and good performance • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

Coming Soon For further information visit www.dwwindsor.com

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

145

Functional

DW400

Product Codes Example 1. Model DW4

DW4

2. Mounting D

Direct Entry

Side Entry

Polycarbonate Bowl

Flat Toughened Glass

4. Control gear – check compatibility with light sources E

Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

5. Light Source 050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C*

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

057P*

57W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

090W

90W CosmoPolis

L230

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245

24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

10/10

31/35

5/25

L230

Suggested column/ bracket options

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

A 5/35

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

B 10/10

• Robust construction – ideal for residential developments • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

C 31/35

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

D 5/25

• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33) • Flat glass option for zero upward light Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) Zebra crossing version available

See pages 298 – 301 for details

Materials A

Ring/entry: Die cast aluminium Canopy: Spun aluminium

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

CMS Harvard LeafNut

CMS Mayflower CLC

CMS Telensa PLANet

Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches

CMS Zodion Vizion

Seals: Silicone rubber C

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = DW4 D F E L230 10 A C * These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

For full range of columns and brackets see page 256

ØB

Dimensions Weight Windage mm kg ØB A B

RAL 6005 50

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Bowl

265

450

9.8

0.09m2

Flat glass

192

450

10.4

0.07m2

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

Flat glass RAL 7016

RAL 9005

5/35

Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø]

DW400

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

8. Switching, dimming & control DW400 shown on Tapered 5m column

Ease of maintenance via quickrelease latches

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green

7. Diamond Optic® setting/LED Array Distribution

RAL 9005 Black

Installation and Maintenance

DW400 For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Light source: See product codes

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below 6m

Options

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl

3. Glazing

DW400 shown on Tubular Steel 6m column

146

Armstrong Road, Maidstone

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

147

Functional

Meridian

Functional

Product Codes

Options Example

1. Model MER

MER

2. Control gear – check compatibility with light sources

10m

Electronic Gear: certain light sources only

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

150S

4 X 150W SON-T+/CDO-TT

150S

150C*

4 X 150W CDM-T

250C*

4 X 250W CDM-T

250S

4 X 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT

140W

4 X 140W CosmoPolis

3. Light Source

4. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10

Suggested column option

10/10

31/35

5/25

6. Switching, dimming & control

Meridian For mounting at 8 – 15 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 4 x 250W Mounting: Post top luminaire to fit 140mm Ø (standard) or 114mm Ø column shaft Glazing: Flat toughened glass Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell (x2) or Nema socket (x2) Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS) Light source: See product codes

Optical control: Diamond Optic®

No Photocell Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Part Night Switch Off

Part Night Dim

Canopy: Spun aluminium

CMS Harvard LeafNut

Entry: Galvanised steel

CMS Mayflower CLC

Access: Stainless steel screws

CMS Telensa PLANet

Seals: Silicone rubber

CMS Zodion Vizion

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Example Code = MER M 150S 10 A N * These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Materials

Installation and Maintenance Ease of maintenance via four, quarter turn screws

For full range of columns see page 256

Meridian

Diamond Optic® Two Directions 10/10

Four Directions 10/10

Two Directions 5/35

Four Directions 5/35

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I • Four sealed optic capsules with independent rotational adjustment facility – allow enhanced fine tuning of optical control • Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

See pages 28 – 31 for details The four Diamond Optic® capsules can rotate through 360º to allow the Meridian to be used for a number of different applications This can be carried out during installation to fine-tune the lighting distribution

• Flat glass for zero upward light

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green

One Direction Ideal for lighting wide areas from one side: e.g. promenades and car parks

Two Directions Ideal for applications such as dual carriageways by mounting the Meridian in the central reservation

Four Directions Ideal for pedestrianised areas, car parks, large roundabouts, market places and junctions

ØB

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

ØC RAL 7037

5/35

RAL 7016

RAL 9005

5. Diamond Optic setting

RAL 9005 Black ®

Meridian shown on Tubular Steel 10m column

148

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

227

1176

127

Weight kg

Windage

0.25m2

Upper Thames Street, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

149

Functional

Toro

Functional

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Toro For mounting at 6 – 8 metres

Cable termination within base of product via IP66 rated connector

TRO

Mounting: Post top luminaire to fit 76mm Ø column shaft

Lamp and gear module complete with isolating terminal block to interrupt power supply on removal

Glazing: Transparent polycarbonate glazing

Tool less access via sealed quarter turn latch

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic control gear Miniature photocell

Optical Distribution

1. Model TRO 2. Control gear – check compatibility with light sources

Electronic Gear: certain light sources only

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

3. Light Source 7m

Toro shown on tapered 8m column

150

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S

100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T

150C

150W CDM-T

090W

90W CosmoPolis

140W

140W CosmoPolis

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

IP66 | IK09 | CLASS II • Purpose designed for amenity and car park lighting • Flat glazing for zero upward light • Tool-less access to lamp and gear module via quarter turn latch

Light source: See product codes LED option available on request

• LED option available on request

Colours: RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey Optical control: Central area optic 090W

Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium

4. Colour 20

Toro

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

5. Control N

No Photocell

Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

Photocell 35lux (1:1)

Example Code = TRO E 090W 20 N

Suggested column option For full range of columns see page 256

Dimensions mm A

534

780

Weight kg

WIndage

0.16m²

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

151

Solar & Wind 153

WIND ENERGY

NIGHT TIME

SOLAR ENERGY

DAY TIME

Solar & Wind Powered Lighting

This system has been designed, analysed and honed over time to offer the greatest cost benefit possible

Lighting Powered by Nature

Stand-Alone & Grid-Connected Systems

154 – 155

156 – 157 ELECTRICITY GRID

Whether wholly embracing energy-saving or choosing a solar or wind product for other practical reasons, DW Windsor has a solution to support your ambitions. Most of our column-mounted, LED luminaires may be used with solar/wind technology to offer the required look and performance. The system can feed back into the local electrical grid or act as a stand-alone (off-grid) system for remote areas. Using the efficiencies of LED and maximising the use of nature’s power, this system has been designed, analysed and honed over a period of time to offer the greatest cost benefit possible.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

154 Solar & Wind

Solar & Wind 155

Solar & Wind

Tried and Tested System

Lighting Powered by Nature

DW Windsor can provide complete systems to suit the needs of individual customers, including all of the elements required in a turn-key solution.

Whilst there are many uncertainties in life, we can be sure that the sun will rise and set each day.

The system has been designed to include: • LED light source, for its long life and low maintenance characteristics

With the sun comes the opportunity to harness some of its power to provide energy through photovoltaic cells to afford lighting without mains power or the carbon associated with it.

• Wind turbine, to harness energy from wind • Photovoltaic panel(s) to harness solar energy • Power storage using 12V batteries (not required for grid-connected systems)

DW Windsor has been trialling different technologies for a number of years, but it is only now that the right turbines, photovoltaic cells, batteries and light sources combination have become available to give the performance required to provide a viable, cost-effective solution.

Our system is designed to use just a single photovoltaic panel, multiple panels or in combination with a wind turbine. When deciding on which to choose there are several considerations to take into account: Location: depending on the exposure to sunlight or good quality wind. Time of day the energy can be harnessed and used: the solar panels harvest energy during the hours of sunlight and this is consumed by the luminaire after dark, whereas a wind turbine will potentially generate energy both day and night.

Suitable Lighting Products

Polar Pages 98 – 99

Dover Pages 96 – 97

Excel Pages 94 – 95

Stratum Pages 92 – 93

DW400 Pages 146 – 147

Evora LED Pages 62 – 63

Monaro LED II Pages 54 – 55

The DW Windsor’s range of LED lighting products are suitable for use with this technology. In addition, any DW Windsor column bracket may be used to mount the luminaire and customer’s bespoke designs for mounting the photovoltaic panels and luminaire can also be accommodated.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

156 Solar & Wind

Stand-Alone System

Grid-Connected System

This type of system is self-contained and does not require connection to a supply of electricity. It contains a means of harvesting natural, renewable energy (either photo-voltaic cells alone or as a combination of cells and a wind turbine), batteries to store this energy until it’s required, a luminaire, a column and brackets on which the cells/turbine and luminaire are mounted and the necessary controls to operate the system.

This type of system is connected to the electricity grid and is less complex than a stand-alone system. It also harvests solar or solar and wind energy but rather than storing this energy in batteries it feeds-in to the electricity grid and revenue is generated from this. When darkness falls, the lights will come on in the same way a conventionally powered street light does and the energy for this comes from the electricity grid.

Advantages

• Self-contained: no mains electricity supply required (negating the need for expensive channelling of cables in inaccessible or remote places to connect to the electricity grid)

• Guaranteed supply of electricity whenever required, irrespective of the weather

Solar & Wind Systems The DW Windsor Solar & Wind system can be used as:

• No connection charges

• Can generate income for the user by way of feed-in tariff incentives

• No future electricity costs and independence from future energy cost increases

• Generates considerably more electricity than it consumes for most of the year

• Grid-connected system

• Produces no carbon emissions

• Inexhaustible energy supply

• No batteries to house or replace

Considerations

The amount of energy captured is dependent on sunlight so short winter days with poor quality of sunlight may not generate the amount of energy required to power the lighting for the required duration. To overcome this potential problem an option has been devised combining energy from the sun and wind.

An electrical grid connection is required so this arrangement cannot be located in areas the grid doesn’t cover. Feed-in tariffs are likely to alter over the life-time of the installation which could affect pay-back calculations.

• Stand-alone system Each has its own benefits and considerations which will need to be assessed depending on the needs of different customers and the circumstances under which the technology is to be used.

For advice and guidance or to discuss particular requirements please contact customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk

Wind turbines can be very effective energy generators in the appropriate location, however not all locations are suitable (e.g. amongst buildings). Energy is stored in batteries which will need to be replaced periodically. The batteries need a suitable place in which to be stored, which could either be in the column base or housed separately in a feeder pillar.

Stand-Alone System Wind Energy

Solar Energy

Wind Energy

DC Energy Provides Power To The Luminaire Night Time

Solar Energy

Grid-Connected System

Day Time

Solar & Wind Systems

Solar & Wind 157

Controls & Batteries Housed In Base

Electricity Grid

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Architectural 159

Architectural Vaio LED

Anello LED

Light Point

Portea LED

Renza LED

160 – 165

166 – 167

168 – 171

172 – 173

174 – 175

Petra

Capra-Mini

Capra

Capra-Compact

Cassia LED

176 – 177

178 – 181

178 – 183

178 – 185

186 – 187

A variety of options are available to highlight architectural and landscaping features. From subtle colour washing and defining paths or building outlines, to punching light up columns and floodlighting façades, this range offers a solution for lighting all urban landscapes. LED and lamped versions are available, allowing powerful and colour changing possibilities with DMX control. The ranges offer useful floodlighting for washing linear surfaces or focused spots of light, controlled by beam angles or asymmetric reflectors. Stainless steel or aluminium bezels offer a choice of looks to suit all environments. For help in lighting different situations see our ‘How-to Guides’ section, page 292.

Deﬁning landscape features

Vaio LED Wimbledon

Colour wash, deﬁne outlines, illuminate columns or floodlight building façades

Lyra

Mano LED

Monza

Malo LED

Luca

188 – 189

190 – 191

192 – 193

194 – 195

196 – 197

Reno

Pharola-Wall

Kona

Vertica LED

Vertica

198 – 199

200 – 201

202 – 203

204 – 205

206 – 207

Tatra

Aventis

210 – 211

212 – 213

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Architectural 161

Vaio LED

Vaio LED Linear illumination

IP67 | IK10 | CLASS III

Features • Linear LED light

Highlighting linear features or making modular patterns in paving, accentuating structures and marking the way for pedestrians are all achievable with Vaio LED. In addition, any RGB colour can be added, with sequencing if required, to give a truly bespoke look to any urban landscape.

• Minimal daytime appearance • Available in five different lengths • Full range of RGB or monochrome colours • Full advice service

Individual modules can be simply aligned to give continuous runs of light. A DMX controller programs the individually addressable modules for accentuated effect. Advice and help with design and on-site programming and installation is offered to ensure the scheme fulﬁls all speciﬁcation requirements.

Available in a range of colours including RGB

Market Street, Rotherham

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

162 Architectural

Vaio LED Wimbledon

Architectural 163

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

164 Architectural

Product Codes Mono Colour

RGB

Example

VAI

1. Model VAI 2. Light Source WW

Warm White LED 2500K

Neutral White 4600K

Cool White LED 7000K

Blue LED

Amber LED

Red LED

Green LED RGB

RGB

500

750 1000

1250

• Warm White – 2500K • Neutral White – 4600K • Cool White – 7000K • Red • Blue • Amber • Green

Option 1 – DMX-CS-001 Standalone Controller

DMX controlled colour changing with individually addressable on board LED drivers

The following options are available to order in multiples of 250mm up to a maximum of 2500mm

500mm 750mm

1000

To allow colour changing sequences, a DMX controller is required to provide the signal to each Vaio

Mounting

250mm

500

DMX Controllers

Mono Colour Available in 250/500/750/1000/ 1250mm lengths

RGB Available in 500/1000mm lengths

3. Size 250

Options

1000mm

1000

1250mm

Option 1 – VAI-SS-F-XXXX Galvanised steel section • Suitable for an in-ground “frameless” look

Example Code = VAI RGB 1000

Power Supply Enclosures A range of power supply enclosures are available designed specifically to work with the Vaio LED system. Each is supplied in an IP66 enclosure complete with power supply and wiring ready for installation. Mono Colour Vaio

RGB Vaio

VAI-75W-ENC 75W Power Supply

10m max Vaio 1 circuit

5m max Vaio 1 circuit

VAI-150W-ENC 150W Power Supply

20m max Vaio 2 circuit

10m max Vaio 2 circuit

VAI-320W-ENC 320W Power Supply

40m max Vaio 4 circuit

20m max Vaio 4 circuit

• Various mounting heights for different paving depths Option 2 – VAI-AL-F-XXXX Aluminium frame section • More suitable for DMX Vaio system • Dedicated cable channel beneath Vaio for easy wiring and access Option 3 – VAI-DR-F-XXXX ACO drainage section • Mounts directly on top of standard ACO drainage sections • Allows combination of lighting and drainage applications Note – Replace XXXX with length required

Wattages

Power supply to Mono Colour Vaio

Mono Colour 7.5W per metre RGB 15W per metre

The following cables have been sized for usage with the power supply enclosures to supply a maximum of 10m of Mono Vaio per circuit.

Other

Cabling Options

<30m to first Vaio

>30m to first Vaio

1 outgoing way

VAI-PSC-MON-251-XX 2.5mm2 Cable

VAI-PSC-MON-401-XX 4.0mm2 Cable

2 outgoing ways

VAI-PSC-MON-252-XX 2.5mm2 Cable

VAI-PSC-MON-402-XX 4.0mm2 Cable

Full technical support available on request Vaio design guide available online

Note – Power cables are available in multiples of 5m lengths, replace XX with required length

<30m to first Vaio

>30m to first Vaio

VAI-PSC-RGB-251-XX 2.5mm2 Cable

VAI-PSC-RGB-401-XX 4.0mm2 Cable

Note – Power cables are available in multiples of 5m lengths, replace XX with required length

• Available in five different lengths for individual or continuous lines of light

• Capable of running one single pre-set sequence at any one time

• Choice of RGB or monochrome, including white, blue and red

Option 2 – DMX-CS-003 Interactive Controller

• DMX controlled colour changing option with individually addressable modules

• Programmable via LCD screen and scroll wheel user control • Can be pre-set to allow various sequences to operate on a calendar basis • Allows modules to be addressed individually to allow a wide range of lighting effects

Extension Cables and Cable Termination Extension cables are required for use between each Vaio within a circuit and are available in standard lengths. The last Vaio on each circuit will require a cable termination plug Mono 1 Metre – VAI-EL-01M 2 Metre – VAI-EL-02M 3 Metre – VAI-EL-03M 5 Metre – VAI-EL-05M 10 Metre – VAI-EL-10M IP68 End Cap – VAI-ECC-M8 RGB 3 Metre – VAI-EL-03M-RGB DMX 120Ω Resistor – VAI-DMX-RESIST (Required for last RGB driver in each circuit) IP68 Cable Termination Plug– VAI-ECC-M8

Installation and Maintenance Continuous lit effect can be achieved by removing supplied end caps Easy to use IP68 plug and socket connector system Vaio LED simply snaps into a ‘U’ Section mounting extrusion for quick & easy installation B

Technical Data Dimensions mm

Can withstand the load of: 15000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph

• Linear LED light for defining or highlighting architecture

• Allows user edited colour changing sequences, inputted via laptop interface and programming software

Cables are combined power and DMX signal in order to limit the number of cables required within the scheme.

1 outgoing way

IP67 | IK10 | CLASS III

• Basic pre-programmable DMX controller

Power supply to RGB Vaio The following cables have been sized for usage with the power supply enclosures to supply a maximum of 5m of RGB Vaio per circuit.

Vaio LED

Architectural 165

Weight kg

250/500•/750 1000•/1250

1.7kg (max)

•RGB 500 & 1000mm lengths only

Unite Building, Liverpool

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

166 Architectural

Product Codes

Options Example

Anello LED 220mm diameter

ANE

Glazing: Toughened glass

1. Model ANE 2. Size 220

220mm outer diameter

220

3. Light Source W

White LED

Blue LED

Example Code = ANE 220 W

Light source: LED Array Colours: White Blue Other colours available on request

Anello LED

Installation and Maintenance

IP67 | IK10 | CLASS III It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 25cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

• Circular ring, in-ground LED feature light • Ideal for creating interesting patterns on pathways

Power supply: Requires 24V power supply

Materials Body: UV resistant nylon Glazing: Opaque toughened glass Sump: Galvanised Steel

• For flush mounting into paved areas or walls

Must not be installed in a recess

Product comes with 25cm prewired flexible cable and M12 metal gland Supplied with galvanised steel sub-frame

Technical Data Walkover only Maximum static load of 1500kg

ØA

ØB

Anello LED

Architectural 167

C Dimensions mm

Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

Weight kg

220

152

100

2.5

Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

168 Architectural

Light Point

Architectural 169

Product Codes Mono Colour

Options

RGB

Example

ILP

1. Model ILP 2. Light Source W

White LED

Blue LED RGB

001 002

Single Lead 002

Glazing: Integral opaque non-slip surface Light source: White LED Blue LED RGB

IP67 | IK09 | CLASS III To install the Light Point, a 60mmØ hole cut into the paved area is required. Sufficient drainage should be provided below the Light Point to avoid water stagnation

Materials

RGB

3. Number of Leads 001

Twin Leads

Example Code = ILP W 001

Light Point

Installation and Maintenance

Light Point

Body/Glazing: Structural Polyurethane

• Marker LED light for flush-mounting into paved areas, walls or steps • Choice of RGB or Mono Colour white or blue

Cable: Abrasion resistant flexible cable

• Gives rimless, even illumination across the opaque lens

Lead Options

• Durable, drive-over construction, with non-slip surface

Option 1 – Single lead connection for Mono Colour Light Point

Must not be installed in a recess

Easy to use tool-less IP68 plug and socket connector system

Option 2 – Twin lead connection for Mono Colour and RGB Light Point

Power Supplies Mono Colour Light Point: 15W IP66 Power Supply Dimensions – 130 x 130 x 75mm ILPPS002 RGB Light Point: 85W IP66 Power Supply Dimensions – 54 x 180 x 90mm ILPPSRGB RGB Control: IP20 RGB sequencer Dimensions – 80 x 80 x 50mm ILPSERGB

Extension Cables

A range of extension cables are available Product Code

Technical Data Monochrome Light Point Average power consumption 0.6W Up to 18 Light Point per power supply Up to 30m between power supply and furthest Light Point Light Points may be reduced in brightness by 50% via a switch in the power supply RGB Light Point Pre-set colour change sequencing available (x2) in a choice of 3 speeds each Light Points can change individually (max 16) or together (max 24) Up to 80m between power supply and furthest Light Point May be DMX controlled To operate up to 16 RGB Light Points 1 x ILPPSRGB, 1 x ILPSERGB and up to 16 x ILPRGB are required To increase spacing between RGB Light Points, RGB extension leads are required

Can withstand the load of a 20000kg vehicle travelling at 30mph

Length

Mono Colour

RGB

ILPP1001

ILPP1RGB

ILPP2001

ILPP2RGB

ILPP5001

ILPP5RGB

To ensure plug and socket connections are permanently secured, a lead connector clamp should be used at every connection Lead Connector Clamp – ILPSS001

Mounting Whilst the Light Point can be mounted directly into a paved area as standard, a range of ground sockets have been designed for ease of installation and future maintenance. Option 1 – A plain ground socket without bezel is available for setting into concrete or where the depth of the paved area in which Light Point is being installed is shallow. Plain Ground Socket – ILPGS001 Option 2 – For situations where a clean edged hole may be difficult to cut, a stainless steel ground socket with 5mm bezel is available. Ground Socket with Bezel – ILPGS002

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

0.2

St. Martin's Quarter, Worcester

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

170 Architectural

Light Point & Lyra St. Martin's Quarter, Worcester

Architectural 171

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

172 Architectural

Portea LED

Architectural 173

Product Codes Example 1. Model PLD

PLD

High Power Uplight

Uplight

Single Window

Triple Window

White LED

Blue LED

Red LED

Amber LED

(1 LED) (9 LEDs) (3 LEDs) (9 LEDs)

Light source: White LEDs Blue LEDs Red LEDs Amber LEDs RGB LEDs available on request

3. Light Source W

High power uplight Uplight Single window Triple window

Glazing: Polycarbonate (Single & Triple window) Toughened glass with prismatic diffuser (Uplight)

2. Style N

Portea LED

Options

Example Code = PLD T W

IP67 | IK07 | CLASS III Must not be installed in a recess

• Decorative in-ground LED light

Cable entry via two PG9 gland for Ø4 – 8mm round cable

• Single or triple window or uplighter versions

Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables

• Choice of monochrome LEDs: white, blue, red and amber

Optional accessories

• High Power Uplight (3.2W) in narrow or wide beam

Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium

15W 700mA constant current electronic driver

• RGB version also available to order

Materials

DRI CC 15W700MA-GT (on tray) DRI CC 15W700MA-RD (in IP67 ground box)

(4 luminaires max – High Power Uplight only)

Body: Technopolymer Bezel: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Sump: Technopolymer

10W 24V constant voltage electronic driver 6 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 18 luminaires max: 3 LED variant

DRI CV 10W24V-GT

Seals: Silicone rubber

Installation and Maintenance Access via Allen screws

40W 24V constant voltage electronic driver

24 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 60 luminaires max: 3 LED variant

DRI CV 40W24V-GT 10W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box

6 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 18 luminaires max: 3 LED variant

DRI CV 10W24V-RD 40W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box 24 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 60 luminaires max: 3 LED variant

DRI CV 40W24V-RD It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 22cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

Technical Data

Uplight

High power uplight Current: 700mA Power: 3.2W Average luminous flux 65 lumens (white) 14 lumens (blue) The High Power Portea requires a constant current driver All other Portea variants require a constant voltage driver High power uplight

Single window

Triple window

Optical Distribution High power uplight

Can withstand a load of: 7500kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2000kg static Glass Temperature

6°Narrow beam

Max – All versions

35°

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A•

Window

157

108

125

140

0.51

Uplight

157

125

140

0.51

•includes ground box

Aspen Court, Cottisford, Northants

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

174 Architectural

Renza LED

Architectural 175

Product Codes Example 1. Model REN

REN

2. Style 1

Single Window

Double Window

Four Window

3. Light Source WW

Warm White 3000K

Neutral White 4000K

Cool White 6000K

RAL 9005 Black

RAL 9006 Aluminium

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

Example Code = REN 2 WW 20

Installation and Maintenance

Single window Double window Four window

Access via Allen screws

Renza LED

Glazing: Internally structured toughened glass

IP67 | IK10 | CLASS I

Light source: Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K

• LED Window marker light, offers different lit effects for pedestrian or trafficked areas

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey Optical control: 1, 2 or 4 x 1W LED Internal prismatic lens

4. Colour 10

Options

• Three window apertures options • Available in a choice of white LEDs It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium

Must not be installed in a recess

Bezel: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium

Driver is integral to the luminaire

Sump: Nylon Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Comes complete with M16 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Optical Distribution Single window

Double window

Technical Data Single window

Double window

Four window

Can withstand a load of: 2000kg vehicle travelling at 12mph 2000kg static

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

113

180

160

1.4

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

176 Architectural

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Single window Double window

Access via Allen screws

PET

Glazing: Curved etched toughened glass

Light source: 35W CDM-T 18, 26W PL-C

035C

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

1. Model PET 2. Style S

Single Window

Double Window

3. Light Source 035C

35W CDM-T

018P

18W PL-C

026P

26W PL-C

Materials

4. Colour 10

RAL 9005 Black

RAL 9006 Aluminium

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

Example Code = PET S 035C 10

Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium

Petra IP67 | IK10 | CLASS I • Performance windowed light, for defining the borders of paths or trafficked areas • Choice of single or double apertures • Convex etched glass gives diffuse lit effect

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 40cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

Bezel: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Sump: Nylon Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Must not be installed in a recess

ØA

Optical Distribution

Single window

Petra

Architectural 177

Plan view

Technical Data Single window

Double window

ØC

Plan view

Can withstand a load of: 2500kg vehicle travelling at 6mph 2000kg static

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

225

260

150

215

3.8

Bengeworth School, Evesham

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Architectural 179

Capra Range

Capra Range Enhance visual characteristics Features

• Choice of light sources including LED

The Capra range of in-ground up-lighters allows a wide range of effects to be achieved from the glow of a marker light to floodlighting a building façade or highlighting architectural features. Capra’s breadth encompasses three different versions: Capra-Mini, for low level lighting; Capra and Capra-Compact for more impactful up-lighting. Capra-Compact allows equivalent outputs to Capra, for where the installation depth is limited.

• Asymmetric and symmetric distributions • Fixed and adjustable reflectors • Small, large and compact versions • Stainless steel or painted bezel options

A choice of light sources, including performance LEDs, combined with an array of beam distributions, gives total design freedom. Static or adjustable reflectors and beam focussing offers additional flexibility, for on-site ﬁnetuning for maximum impact.

Capra range available with LED and conventional light sources

Bengeworth School, Evesham

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

180 Architectural

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage – 20W

Access via Allen screws

CPM

Compact Fluorescent Maximum lamp wattage – 10W

1. Model CPM

CPM

2. Light Source 020C

10W PL-C WW

Warm White LED 3000K

Cool White LED 6000K

Narrow Beam – 6°

Elliptical Beam – 50 x 10°

3. Optical Control N

Asymmetric Beam

4. Colour 7

Stainless Steel

RAL 7039 Quartz Grey

Example Code = CPM CW N AX

Optical Distribution Narrow beam 20W CDM-TM

Narrow beam LED

±7º Adjustable

6º beam

LED Maximum wattage – 6.6W

• Mini version of Capra for lighting small features or way marking

Glazing: Clear toughened glass Frosted toughened glass available on request

• Available in LED, metal halide and compact fluorescent

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear as standard – Lamped version Complete with mains voltage power supply – LED version

Wide Beam – 115°

IP67 | IK09 | CLASS II

Asymmetric Maximum lamp wattage – 20W

20W CDM-TM 010P

Capra-Mini

Light source: 20W CDM-T 10W PL-T 6 x 1.1W LED

• Choice of white LED colour temperatures

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

• Adjustable optic for accurate focussing

Must not be installed in a recess

Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables

Optical control: Narrow beam Elliptical beam Wide beam Asymmetric reflector

Comes complete with M20 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Materials Body: Techno Polymer Bezel: Painted aluminium or stainless steel bezel Sump: Techno Polymer Seals: Anti-ageing silicone gasket

±7º Adjustable

10º beam

±7º Adjustable

50º x 10º Elliptical beam

Elliptical beam LED

LED

Wide beam 10W PL-C ØA

Technical Data

Capra-Mini

Architectural 181

115º beam

Asymmetric reflector 20W CDM-TM

Metal Halide

Can withstand a load of: 6000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2000kg static

±7º Adjustable

100º beam Imax 8º

80°

Compact Fluorescent

52°

6 LED

40°

Asymmetric

Glass Temperature 20W CDM-TM

Compact Fluorescent

Dimensions mm

All Versions

Weight kg

190

275

2.8

Capra Bentley Showroom, Leicester

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

182 Architectural

Product Codes Capra 1

Access via Allen screws

Capra 2

Capra 3

Example

CA2

CA3

CA1

Capra 2 – Compact Fluorescent Maximum lamp wattage: 42W

2. Light Source 035C

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T 018P

18W PL-C

042P

42W PL-T 070TD

035C

70W HQI-TS

3. Optical Control N

Narrow Beam – 6°

Medium Beam – 50° x 10°

Installation and Maintenance

Capra 1 – Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

1. Model CA1

Options

Wide Beam – 115° A

Asymmetric Beam

4. Colour 7

Stainless Steel

RAL 7039 Quartz Grey

Example Code = CA1 035C M 7

Capra IP67 | IK10 | CLASS II

Capra 3 – Asymmetric Maximum lamp wattage: 70W Glazing: Clear toughened glass

• In-ground up-light for low level marker or high powered accent lighting

Frosted toughened glass available on request

• Range of beam distributions and adjustable optics, allowing on-site focussing

Gear, switching and control: Magnetic gear Electronic control gear available on request

• Available in metal halide or compact fluorescent versions

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

• Choice of stainless steel or painted aluminium bezels

Light source: 35, 70W CDM-T 18W PL-C 42W PL-T Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Must not be installed in a recess

Comes complete with PG16 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired

Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam Asymmetric reflector

Optical Distribution

Materials

Capra 1 – Metal halide 35W, 70W CDM-T

Body: Extruded aluminium

Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Bezel: Painted aluminium or stainless steel bezel Sump: PVC Seals: Silicone rubber

Adjustable optic ±10° Narrow beam 10°

Adjustable optic ±10° Medium beam 30°

Capra 1 Adjustable optic ±10° Wide beam 50°

Capra 2 – Compact fluorescent 18W PL-C, 42W PL-T

Metal Halide

Technical Data ØA

Fixed lamp position

Wide beam 115°

Capra 3 – Asymmetric 70W HQI-TS

Adjustable optic ±10° Imax 30° Wide beam 70°

Can withstand a load of: 7500kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2500kg static

Capra

Architectural 183

Capra 2

Capra 3

Compact Fluorescent

Asymmetric

Glass Temperature 35W CDM-T

83°

70W CDM-T

106°

18W PL-C

51°

42W PL-T

87°

70W HQI-TS

107°

C Dimensions mm

All Versions

Weight kg

270

354

250

7.7 (max)

Bengeworth School, Evesham

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

184 Architectural

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Access via Allen screws

CPC

LED Maximum wattage: 16.5W

1. Model CPC

CPC

2. Light Source 035C

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T 070TD

035C

Warm White LED 3000K

Cool White LED 6000K

Narrow Beam – 10°

Medium Beam – 30°

Stainless Steel

RAL 7039 Quartz Grey

• Available in LED and Metal Halide • Choice of white LED colour temperatures

Optical Control: Narrow beam Medium beam Elliptical beam Asymmetric reflector

Example Code = CPC 035C M 7

Optical Distribution

Must not be installed in a recess

Product can be loop in/out cabled (using flexible cable) directly into an IP68 rated gear housing, located in the sump

Materials

Narrow beam 35W, 70W CDM-T

Supplied with mains voltage power supply

Body: Die cast aluminium Bezel: Painted aluminium or stainless steel bezel

Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables

Sump: Techno polymer Adjustable optic ±10°

• Wide range of beam angles, adjustable optic or asymmetric distributions

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel Bezel

Asymmetric Beam

4. Colour 7

• Compact version of the Capra range, suitable for installations with confined depth

LED: 15 x 1.1W Warm White 3000K Cool White 6000K

Wide Beam – 50° x 10° A

Compact sump allows shallow installation

Light source: 35W CDM-T 70W CDM-T 70W HQI-TS

3. Optical Control

IP67 | IK10 | CLASS I

Glazing: Clear toughened glass Frosted toughened glass available on request

70W HQI-TS WW

Capra-Compact

Seals: Silicone rubber

10° Beam

Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Narrow beam LED

10°Beam

Medium beam 35W, 70W CDM-T

30° Beam

Adjustable optic ±10°

ØA

Elliptical beam LED

Technical Data

Asymmetric reflector HQI-TS

50º x 10º Beam

Can withstand a load of: 7500kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2500kg static Glass Temperature

Adjustable optic ±10°

70° Beam Imax 30°

ØA

Capra-Compact

Architectural 185

LED

45°

35W CDM-T

80°

70W HQI-TS

119°

Shallow, 165mm installation depth F Dimensions mm

Weight kg

274

114

165

346

500

661

11.7 max

Capra City of Sunderland College & St. Peter's Sixth Form

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

186 Architectural

Product Codes Version 1

Access via Allen screws

Version 2

Example

CAS

Version 2 220mm Ø – 7 x 1W LEDs

2. Light Source 3 7

7 LEDs – 220mmØ

Narrow Beam – 10°

Medium Beam – 35°

Wide Beam – 50°

4. LED Type WW

Warm White 3000K

Neutral White 4000K

Cool White 6000K

Example Code = CAS 7 NB NW

Cassia LED IP67 | IK09 | CLASS I | CLASS II

Glazing: Clear toughened glass

3 LEDs – 130mmØ

3. Optical Control NB

Installation and Maintenance

Version 1 130mm Ø – 3 x 1W LEDs

1. Model CAS

Options

220mm Version

130mm Version

Gear, switching and control: 24V Power supply required for 130mm Ø

• Circular in-ground LED feature up-lighting

Complete with mains voltage driver for 220mm Ø

• Choice of narrow, medium or wide beam distributions

Light source: Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K

• Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 40cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

• Robust stainless steel body ideal for harsh environments

Colour: Stainless Steel Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam Adjustable reflector (220mmØ)

Must not be installed in a recess

Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables

Materials Body: Stainless steel

Product is supplied with 25cm of cable to allow easy installation

Bezel: Stainless steel Sump: Nylon

Optional accessories

Seals: Silicone rubber

20W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box (6 luminaires max) DRI CV 40W24V-RD IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Optical Distribution Version 1 – 130mm Ø

Narrow beam 10°

ØB Wide beam 50°

Technical Data

Version 2 – 220mm Ø

Narrow beam 10°

Adjustable optic ±10°

Can withstand a load of: 6000kg vehicle travelling at 9mph 2000kg static Glass Temperature Medium beam 35°

Version 2 220mmØ

Cassia LED

Architectural 187

Adjustable optic ±10°

Max – All versions

45°

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

130

120

220

185

150

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

188 Architectural

Product Codes Lyra 1 Symmetric & asymmetric

Lyra 1 Adjustable

Example

1. Model LYR1

LYR1

2. Optical Control S

Symmetric

Asymmetric V

Adjustable

3. Colour 070HD

70W HQI-TS 070C

070C

Lyra 2 Asymmetric

Example

LYR2

1. Model LYR2

Installation and Maintenance

Lyra 1 Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Access via Allen screws

2. Optical Control

IP67 | IK10 | CLASS I

Glazing: Clear toughened glass Light source: 70W HQI-TS 35, 70W CDM-T 18, 26W PL-C

• In-ground up-light for wall-washing or highlighting trees

Colour: Stainless Steel Bezel

• Robust stainless steel bezel for improved daytime appearance

• Choice of symmetric, asymmetric or adjustable optics

Symmetric A

Asymmetric

Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Must not be installed in a recess

Sump: Nylon

Comes complete with two M20 plastic cable glands and 25cm of cable pre-wired

Seals: Silicone rubber

3. Light Source 035C

035C

35W CDM-T

018P

18W PL-C

026P

26W PL-C

• Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 45cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

Bezel: Stainless steel

Lyra

Lyra 2 Maximum lamp wattage: 35W

Optical control: Symmetric reflector Asymmetric reflector Adjustable reflector (+/-15°)

70W CDM-T

Example Code = LYR1 S 070C

Lyra 2 Symmetric

Options

Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables

035C

Optional accessories

Example Code = LYR2 S 035C

IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Lyra 2

Optical Distribution

ØB

Lyra 1

Technical Data

Lyra

Architectural 189

Symmetric optic

Asymmetric optic

Adjustable optic ±15°

Can withstand the load of: 2500kg vehicle travelling at 12mph

Lyra 2

Lyra 1

Glass Temperature

Symmetric optic

Asymmetric optic

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

35W CDM-T

105°

70W CDM-T

115°

18W PL-C

50°

320

302

400

11.3

26W PL-C

62°

219

220

270

3.5

Orchard Theatre, Dartford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

190 Architectural

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Circular version 310mm Ø 117mm in depth

Access via Allen screws

MAN

Square version 310mm 117mm in depth

1. Model MAN 2. Style C

Circular Version

Square Version

3. Optical Control N

Narrow Beam – 10°

Medium Beam – 30°

4. Light Source WW

Warm White 3000K

Neutral White 4000K

Cool White 6000K

Example Code = MAN C N NW

Mano LED IP67 | IK09 | CLASS I

Glazing: Clear toughened glass

• Performance, in-ground LED light, ideal for lighting walls or columns

Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply

• Choice of square or circular versions with stainless steel bezel

Dimmable versions available upon request Light source: Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

• Durable construction to withstand light vehicular traffic

Colour: Stainless Steel Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam

Must not be installed in a recess

Materials

Product comes with 25cm prewired flexible cable and M20 plastic cable gland

Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium

LED Driver is integral to the luminaire

Bezel: Stainless steel

Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables

Sump: Nylon Seals: Silicone rubber

Optional Accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Optical Distribution Both versions

Technical Data B A

Mano LED

Architectural 191

Narrow beam 10°

Can withstand a load of: 6000kg vehicle travelling at 9mph 2000kg static Glass Temperature Medium beam 30°

Max – All versions

45°

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

Circular

117

310

120

Square

117

310

120 405

405 5.0 5.2

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

192 Architectural

Monza

Architectural 193

Product Codes Asymmetric

Narrow beam

Example

MON

1. Model MON 2. Light Source 070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT

070T

070S

70W CDM-TD / SON-TD 035C

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T

042P 2. Frame F

With glazing frame

Without glazing frame

Asymmetric

3. Reflector N

Narrow Beam – 15°

Example Code = MON 070S N A

Installation and Maintenance

Monza with frame For surface mounting Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Access via Allen screws

Monza

Monza without frame For flush mounting Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

IP67 | IK10 | CLASS II

Glazing: Toughened glass Low temperature glass fitted as standard to all version except 42W PL-T option

42W PL-T

Options

• In-ground up-light for washing light up vertical architectural features • Choice of narrow or medium beam

Light source: 70W SON-T+, CDO-TT 70W CDM-TD, SON-TD 35W CDM-T 70W CDM-T 42W PL-T

• User adjustable narrow beam reflector allows 0 to -10° adjustment for accurate focusing

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 30cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

• Available frameless for mounting flush with the ground or with marine grade stainless steel frame • Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic

Colour: Stainless Steel Optical control: Asymmetric wide beam

Must not be installed in a recess

Narrow beam with adjustable reflector

Cable Entry via two M20 glands for Ø10 – 14mm round cable Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables

Materials Body: Technopolymer Bezel: Grade 316 Stainless Steel Sump: Technopolymer

Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Seals: Silicone rubber

Optical Distribution Asymmetric reflector 42W PL-T 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT 70W CDM-TD/SON-TD

Technical Data

Without frame Medium beam 60°

Imax 10°

Narrow beam reflector 35, 70W CDM-T

Adjustable optic +10º – 0º

Can withstand a load of: 12000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 3000kg static Glass Temperature

Narrow beam 15°

42W PL-T

55°

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT

70°

70W CDM-TD/SON-TD

80°

35W CDM-T

64°

70W CDM-T

110°

305

255

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

8.0

Luton Hoo Hotel, Bedfordshire

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

194 Architectural

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Version 1 645mm – 12 LED

Access via Allen screws

MAL

Version 2 1245mm – 24 LED

1. Model MAL 2. No of LEDs 12 (645mm)

24 (1245mm)

Narrow Beam – 10°

Medium Beam – 30°

3. Optical Control

4. LED Type WW

Warm White 3000K

Neutral White 4000K

Cool White 6000K

Example Code = MAL 24 N NW

Malo LED IP67 | IK09 | CLASS II

Glazing: Clear toughened glass

• Linear LED in-ground light, for wall washing in pedestrian areas

Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply

• Two lengths available, each offering narrow or medium beam angles for different lit effects

Light source: LED: 12 or 24 x 1W Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K

• Fixed symmetric or asymmetric distribution • Available in a choice of white LEDs

Colours: RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Adjustable symmetric distribution It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 25cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Bezel: Aluminium Sump: Nylon Seals: Silicone rubber

Must not be installed in a recess

Cable entry via PG13.5 gland for Ø9 – 12mm round cable Supplied with two cable glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring

Optical Distribution Version 1 – 645mm

Adjustable optic ±12° Narrow beam 10°

B A

Adjustable optic ±12° Medium beam 30° C

Malo LED

Architectural 195

Version 2 – 1245mm D E

Adjustable optic ±12° Narrow beam 10°

Technical Data Dimensions mm

Walkover only: Maximum static load of 1500kg Glass Temperature Adjustable optic ±12° Medium beam 30°

All versions

45°

Weight kg

645

835

3.9

79 1245 95 1435 95

6.9

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

196 Architectural

Luca

Architectural 197

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Luca Maximum lamp wattage: 24W

Access via Allen screws

LUC

Glazing: Toughened glass

1. Model LUC 2. Optical Control A

Asymmetric

Symmetric

14W T5 HE

024T

24W T5 HO

Stainless Steel

• For individual use or creating continuous lines of light for walk or drive over applications

Colours: RAL 9006 Aluminium Grade 316 Stainless Steel

4. Colour RAL 9006 Aluminium

• Linear fluorescent up-light for subtle wall washing

Light source: 14W T5 High efficiency 28W T5 High output

014T

IP67 | IK09 | CLASS II

Gear, Switching and Control: Electronic gear

3. Light Source 014T

Luca • Choice of asymmetric or symmetric distribution

Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Symmetric reflector

Example Code = LUC A 014T 26

Materials Body: Technopolymer Frame: Die cast aluminium or stainless steel 316

• Symmetrical version provides non-slip glazing and low surface temperature, making it ideal for pedestrian areas • Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 25cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

Sump: Technopolymer Seals: Silicone rubber

Must not be installed in a recess

Cable entry via PG13 gland for Ø9 – 12mm round cable Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Technical Data Up to five Luca with the aluminium frame, or ten with the stainless steel frame, can be installed in a continuous line by using the Joining Accessory. This number is restricted only by the effects of thermal expansion outdoors. In an interior application, up to 50 can be joined together over a distance of 200m. Due to electrical limitations the following is a guide to the maximum number of products per circuit:

Joining accessories: Aluminium: LUC-JA-26 Stainless Steel: LUC-JA-07

Up to 90 14W Luca may be connected over a distance of 75m Up to 70 24W Luca may be connected over a distance of 60m

Optical Distribution Can withstand a load of: 12000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 3000kg static Glass Temperature Symmetric

Asymmetric

All versions

47°

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

670

630

150

130

4.5

Luton Hoo Hotel, Bedfordshire

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

198 Architectural

Reno

Architectural 199

Product Codes Example 1. Model REN

REN

2. Light Source 014T

14W T5 HE

021T

21W T5 HO

028T

28W T5 HE

035T

35W T5 HE

024T

24W T5 HO

039T

39W T5 HO

049T

49W T5 HO

054T

54W T5 HO

080T

80W T5 HO

Example Code = REN 014T

014T

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Reno Maximum lamp wattage: 80W

Access via quick release latches

Glazing: Toughened glass Gear, Switching and Control: Electronic gear Light source: 14, 21, 28, 35W T5 High efficiency 24, 39, 49, 54, 80W T5 High output Mounting: Bracket mounted Colour: Anodised/RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Two position reflector allows for narrow (62 – 64º) or wide (70 – 78º) distributions

Materials Body: Anodised extruded aluminium with die cast aluminium ends finished RAL 9006 Aluminium Brackets: Die cast aluminium finished RAL 9006 Aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber

Reno

Cable entry via two M18 glands for Ø8 – 10.5mm round cable Supplied with two cable glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS II

Supplied with a pair of cast aluminium supports which provide adjustment of ±12º either side of vertical

• Surface mounted linear fluorescent luminaire • Wide range of T5 lamps from 14W – 80W

May be wall mounted on adjustable brackets, which are available as 100mm or 300mm projection. Reno can be tilted on these brackets to any setting on an arc of 240º for the 100mm bracket or 260º for the 300mm bracket. This allows the Reno to be directed at the wall to illuminate signage, the mounting surface etc

• Reflector adjusts on-site to narrow or wide beam distribution • Adjustable wall or ceiling mounting brackets allow adjustment of light through an arc of 240º

A number of Reno can be connected over a maximum distance of 60m from the mains supply to the final product Optional accessories Adjustable wall brackets 100mm RNO-WBA-100 Adjustable wall brackets 300mm RNO-WBA-300

Optical Distribution Dimensions mm

Side view

End view

Weight kg

700, 1000, 1300 & 1600

105

4.9 (max)

Salonika Church, St. Dimitar, Veliko Tarnovo, Bulgaria

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

200 Architectural

Product Codes Example

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Angled

For ease of installation product comes pre-wired with 1m of flexible cable

Flat

1. Model PHW

PHW

Glazing: Diffused Acrylic

Gear, switching and control: Integral LED driver

2. Height A

Angled

Flat

3. Colour DB

DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

With 180°back shield

Without 180°back shield

4. Back Shield

Example Code = PHW A DB B

Pharola-Wall IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I • Wall mounted luminaire using high efficiency, side emitting LEDs

Light source: LED Neutral White – 4100K

• Angled or flat mounted versions • Consistent scheme design can be achieved using Pharola bollards (see pages 228 – 229)

Colour: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White Optical control: 5 x 2.4W LED High Efficiency Side Emitting Lens

Materials Head: Corrosion protected aluminium Glazing: Acrylic Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Optical Distribution C

Angled

Flat

Dimensions mm

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

RAL 9006

RAL 9007

ØC

DB 703

Pharola-Wall

Architectural 201

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

Angled

300

600

178

8.0

Flat

210

275

7.3

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

202 Architectural

Kona

Architectural 203

Product Codes Example 1. Model KON

KON

2. Optical Control N

Narrow Beam – 10°

Medium Beam – 30°

Wide Beam – 70°

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T

150C

150W CDM-T

070C

4. Colour 10

RAL 9005 Black

RAL 9006 Aluminium

Installation and Maintenance

Kona Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Access via Allen screws

Glazing: Toughened glass Gear: Electronic gear, some models

3. Light Source 035C

Options

Example Code = KON M 070C 10

Kona

Product is supplied with M16 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable Control gear is integral to the luminaire

IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I | CLASS II Electronic Gear

Light source: 35W CDM-T (Electronic Gear) 70W CDM-T (Electronic Gear) 150W CDM-T (Magnetic Gear)

Magnetic Gear

• Wall mounted spot light with three beam angled versions to create different lit effects

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium

• The head adjusts in two planes: 90º vertical and 180º horizontal • Optional light hood offers additional control

Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam

• Pole mounting can be achieved using additional bracket

Materials Body: Die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated Optional accessories Light Hood Black: KLH-10 Aluminium: KLH-26 Pole Mounting Bracket (to fit pole Ø60 – Ø76) Black: KPB-10 Aluminium: KPB-26

Optional Light Hood

Optical Distribution

Dimensions mm Narrow beam 10º

Medium beam 30º

Wide beam 70º

Weight kg

480

165

255

125

5.8

Bergamo, Italy

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

204 Architectural

Vertica LED

Architectural 205

Product Codes Example 1. Model VERL

VERL 70mm Ø 2

070

Glazing: Clear toughened glass

110mm Ø

1 Way

2 Way

Narrow Beam – 10°

Medium Beam – 30°

4. Optical Control

Wide Beam – 50°

5. Light Source WW

Warm White 3000K

Neutral White 4000K

Cool White 6000K

RAL 9005 Black

RAL 9006 Aluminium

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

RAL 9016 White

Access via Allen screws

Vertica LED 2 110mm Ø

3. Light Emission

Installation and Maintenance

Vertica LED 1 70mm Ø

VERL

2. Style 1

Options

6. Colour 10

Vertica LED

Cable entry via rubber cable gland Driver is integral to the luminaire

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I | CLASS II (110mm Ø)

(70mm Ø)

Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply

• Wall mounted for wall washing or accent lighting

Light source: LED Array

• Choice of single or dual emission for different lighting effects

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 9106 White

• Available with three beam angles • Available in two sizes • See pages 206 – 207 for lamped versions

Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam Vertica LED 1 3 x 1W LED per window Vertica LED 2 5 x 1W LED per window

Example Code = VERL 070 02 NB WW 10

Materials Body: Die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber gaskets Finish: Polyester powder coated

Optical Distribution Vertica LED 1 – 70mm Ø

Narrow beam 10°

Wide beam 50°

Vertica LED 2 – 100mm Ø

Narrow beam 10° Dimensions mm

Medium beam 30°

Weight kg

Vertica LED 1

220

120

1.5

Vertica LED 2

400

170

110

2.1

Lamped Vertica Clivedon Road, Buckinghamshire

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

206 Architectural

Vertica

Architectural 207

Product Codes Tall

Short

Example

1. Model VERT

VERS

VERT

2. Light Source 035C

035C

070C

35W CDM-T

035C

70W CDM-T

3. Light Output 01

1 Way

2 Way

Narrow Beam – 16°

4. Beam Angle NB MB WB

Medium Beam – 30° Wide Beam – 100°

5. Colour 10

RAL 9005 Black

RAL 9006 Aluminium

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

RAL 9016 White

Example Code = VERT 035C 02 NB 10

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Vertica Tall Maximum lamp wattage – 2 x 70W CDM-T

Access via stainless steel screws

Vertica Short Maximum lamp wattage – 1 x 35W CDM-T

Vertica

Wiring via two rubber glands for flexible cable

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

Glazing: Clear toughened glass

• Wall mounted for wall washing or accent lighting

Light source: Vertica Tall 1 x or 2 x 35W, 70W CDM-T

• Choice of single or dual emission for different lighting effects

Vertica Short 1 x 35W CDM-T

• Two height options

• Available with three beam angles • See pages 204 – 205 for LED versions

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 9106 White Optical control: Vertica Tall Wide beam Narrow beam

Vertica Tall

Vertica Short Medium beam

Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber gaskets Finish: Polyester powder coated

Optical Distribution Vertica short

Medium beam 30°

Vertica tall

Vertica Short Narrow beam 16º Dimensions mm

Wide beam 100°

Weight kg

Short

280

265

180

4.8

Tall

500

265

180

8.8

Vertica Short St. Martin’s Quarter, Worcester

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

208 Architectural

Vertica Talbot Green Retail Park, Wales

Architectural 209

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

210 Architectural

Tatra

Architectural 211

Product Codes Example 1. Model TAR

TAR

2. Light Source 018P

18W PL-T

White LED

3. Colour 10

RAL 9005 Black

RAL 9006 Aluminium

RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

RAL 9016 White

Example Code = TAR W 20

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Tatra Tatra LED

Access via Allen screws

Glazing: Sandblasted glass Light source: 18W PL-T White LED

Tatra

LED version: driver is integral to the luminaire Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable

IP65 | IK07 | CLASS I • Surface mounted low level marker, to define the borders of paths or buildings

Mounting: Flange plate

• For mounting directly on the ground or on walls

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 9016 White

• Subtle lit effect created by diffusing light through sandblasted glass • Choice of compact fluorescent or LED light source

Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Aluminium finish

Optical Distribution Tatra

Tatra LED Dimensions mm

Weight kg

210

200

2.4 (max)

Stanhope Road, St Albans

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

212 Architectural

Aventis

Architectural 213

Product Codes Large

Small

Example

1. Model AVL

AVS

Plain

Eyelid

1 x 28W 2D

038D

1 x 38W 2D

028DE

1 x 28W 2D EMR

038DE

Glazing: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate diffuser

1 x 10W PL-C

013P

1 x 13W PL-C

018P

1 x 18W PL-C

218P

LED

LED Array

LEDE

LED Array EMR

Black

Aluminium

LED

• Tough polycarbonate diffuser for protection against vandalism • Now available in LED as well as compact fluorescent • Motion detection sensors for further energy savings • Emergency versions available

Materials Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium

4. Colour

Example Code = AVL P LED 10

• Surface mounted luminaire to light the exterior of buildings

Other: Motion detection version for LED option available on request

2 x 26W PL-C

LED

IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

LED version: driver is integral to the luminaire

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium

2 x 18W PL-C

226P

Aventis

Supplied with two M16 glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring for flexible cable only

Light source: LED Array LED Array EMR (integral emergency) 28, 38W 2D EMR (integral emergency) 1 x 10, 1 x 13, 1 x 18W PL-C 2 x 18, 2 x 26W PL-C

1 x 38W 2D EMR 010P

Access for relamping via Allen screws

Aventis Small Maximum lamp wattage: 1 x 18W

3. Light Source 028D

Installation and Maintenance

Aventis Large Maximum lamp wattage: 2 x 26W

AVL

2. Style P

Options

Diffuser: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated Control Gear: High frequency electronic

Aventis Eyelid

Optical Distribution Plain

Dimensions mm

Eyelid

Weight kg

Large

Plain

360

145

3.7

Eyelid

360

155

4.5

Dimensions mm

•with emergency gear

Weight kg

Small

4.7•

Plain

265

100

1.5

5.5•

Eyelid

265

105

1.9

Plain

Kingshill Retail Centre, Kent

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Illuminated LED Handrail 215

Illuminated LED Handrail Market-leading performance

Providing a bespoke concept to completion solution

Design Philosophy

Garda LED Handrail

216 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 217

218 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 219

How to Illuminate Areas using Garda LED Handrail 220 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 221

Bespoke LED handrail and balustrade system engineered to provide a choice of asymmetric or symmetric lighting distributions. Garda LED is manufactured in a durable grade 316 stainless steel and offers specifiers an innovative task-lighting solution with market-leading photometric performance and uniformity. Suitable for a wide range of interior and exterior applications, with an emergency option available, Garda particularly comes into its own where access for maintenance is restricted such as stairways. Providing glare-free lighting, with a downward facing lightsource to eliminate upward light, Garda has an intelligent design that manages voltage drop over distances up to 40m, meaning constant light levels through a single power feed, low energy consumption and negligible maintenance through high-power LEDs. Available in straight, curved or arched sections, with round or square stanchions, a wide selection of in-fill options and finishing details such as a warm-to-touch coating, Garda offers a total solution from concept to completion that includes a full site survey, project management and installation.

Garda with staged dimming to 25% of full output, illuminated both sides with an asymmetric distribution Hyde Park Corner, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

216 Illuminated LED Handrail

Illuminated LED Handrail 217

Garda

Award-winning design

Handrail Handrails are typically used to provide guidance, stability or support to pedestrians. Garda is available with an asymmetric or symmetric distribution to best suit your application – whether affixing to a wall or from a more central location through the support of stanchions.

Award for Urban Lighting: Essex Street Steps Hyde Park Corner, London

Essex Street Steps, London

design philosophy

Exterior Luminaire of the Year

Garda key advantages Style • Bespoke welded construction with no visible joints

Balustrade Balustrade is the term used to describe the entire handrail system, including stanchions and infill. As a general rule, any unprotected edge of a walkway, platform, staircase or other raised area from which a person may fall more than 0.5m must be fitted with such a system. Garda’s asymmetric beam angle is ideally suited to such applications and complies with Building Regulations Part K. Light is directed where it is needed, enabling excellent facial recognition whilst minimising light spill into sensitive areas such as waterways, thus reducing any potential impact on wildlife.

Performance • Market-leading photometric performance, with unparalleled uniformity: Garda illuminates pathways in excess of two metres wide • Extremely high strength mechanical design, with a 3mm wall thickness Control • Symmetric distribution with purpose designed high performance prismatic lens

Leominster Station

Lea Bridge Underpass, Hackney

Crayford Waterside, Kent

SCRM Building, Edinburgh

• Genuine asymmetric distribution achieved through purpose-designed micro-reflector and high performance asymmetric prismatic lens

Typical applications Garda provides an excellent solution across a wide range of both internal and external applications. From lighting internal staircases, balconies and ramps to exterior spaces such as bridges, walkways and parks, the Garda LED Illuminated Handrail has the ability to adapt to every setting.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

218 Illuminated LED Handrail

Garda Working with you

Illuminated LED Handrail 219

Standard Infill Options

From concept to completion, DW Windsor provides a comprehensive service including: • Full site survey • Lighting and structural design • Custom manufacture • Installation by our specialist stainless steel contractors • Full project management and technical guidance

Glass

Please contact us on 01992 474600 for further information on the full range of services provided for Garda or see dww-garda.com/dwwindsor.com

Options

Materials

Linear and flexible modular lengths available: 300mm 600mm 900mm 1200mm

LED Module

Light source: 300mm: 3 LED (3.6W) 600mm: 6 LED (7.2W) 900mm: 9 LED (10.8W) 1200mm: 12 LED (14.4W)

Railing System

L70 lifetime prediction: In excess of 60,000 hours

Installation and Maintenance

Solid Bar

End Caps: Injection moulded polycarbonate

IP66 | IK10 | CLASS III

Glazing: Extruded polycarbonate

• Bespoke LED handrail and balustrade system

Rail and Stanchions: Grade 316 stainless steel with a wall thickness of 3mm

Colour rendering index: 75 / 85Ra

Garda LED illuminated handrail is an integrated, seamlessly welded, bespoke solution and as such requires a high level of expertise and knowledge in its design, fabrication and installation

Optical control: Symmetric distribution – 112º beam angle Asymmetric distribution – 56º beam angle

DW Windsor provides a complete survey, design and installation service as standard to ensure we support your project from concept through to completion

Colour temperature: Neutral White 4000K Warm White 3000K

Garda

Body: Anodised extruded aluminium

• Grade 316 stainless steel • Choice of genuine asymmetric or symmetric distributions providing market-leading uniformity • Straight or flexible modules for straight, curved or arched rails • Available in Warm White 3000K or Neutral White 4000K to suit internal and external applications • Dimmable • Emergency option available

Balusters: Circular stanchions as standard Square and other shapes on request Power supply options: 24V to 48V AC or DC, Class III SELV, 350mA Range of power supplies available Emergency option available (3 hour duration) Other: Anti-tamper screws fitted as standard Warm-to-touch coating available

Tension Wire

A wide selection of infill options and materials are available Please contact us to discuss any special infill requirements

Optical Distribution Asymmetric distribution 56° beam angle

Symmetric distribution 112° beam angle

Please note information shown is not exhaustive and may be subject to change as technology continually evolves or to best suit project requirements

Handrail Dimensions Ø50

Hyde Park Corner, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

220 Illuminated LED Handrail

Illuminated LED Handrail 221

How to illuminate areas using Garda LED Handrail Essex Street Steps case study

Stair cases

Open footbridges

General information

Wide stair cases with centre handrails should utilise the symmetric distribution modules to provide an even spread of lighting up the centre of a walkway. If required asymmetric modules can be positioned at the sides to increase the coverage further. On narrow flights single sided asymmetric modules will be sufficient to achieve levels in excess of 100lux at ground level.

Footbridges with open side railings such as road or rail bridges should be lit in such a way that modules are facing away from users below the level of the bridge to avoid any unnecessary glare, this practice should also be considered for the users of the bridge itself so as they ascend light sources are directed away from their field of vision as much as practically possible.

Light levels at ground level can be expected at the following distances from the modules:

Stairs with central symmetric and peripheral asymmetric modules provide required levels of light

Ramps & walkways

Before installation – Essex Street Steps, London

Before (see image above) • Uninviting cut-through from Temple tube station to the Royal Courts of Justice • Difficulty with maintaining high level luminaire and short life of lamp used (70W CDO-TT) After (see image left) Single sided asymmetric Garda LED Handrail providing; • Improved public and workforce safety • Reduced carbon footprint through decreased maintenance cycles • Central Management System operated for greater control

Garda LED Handrail, illuminated from one side with an asymmetric distribution Essex Street Steps, London

Generally lighting levels as laid out in the British Standards and the Disability Discrimination Act 2005 can be met from a single sided arrangement on areas up to two metres wide, asymmetric distribution modules should be spaced suitably apart either as wall or balustrade mounted to ensure good ground uniformity between modules. If a walkway is next to a river or area of environmental sensitivity then use of the asymmetric distribution module will ensure light is only placed where it is required, limiting back spill.

0 – 1.25m: 100lux 1.25 – 1.5m: 50lux 1.5 – 1.75m: 25lux

100lux@1.25m 100 – 50lux@1.5m 50 – 25lux@1.75m

Footbridge over rail track. Asymmetric modules face away from the track to avoid drivers experiencing glare from the steps

Continuous lighting In order to provide a good level of uniformity required for the above task areas, the lighting should be as continuous as possible throughout the handrail. Illuminating small sections and curved handrail ensure that there are no dark patches or un-lit areas which lead to reduced uniformity levels and patchy looking lighting.

Control of glare An important factor to consider when lighting open staircases, ramps and walkways is minimalising any glare which may affect the usage of the area. Various methods can be introduced in order to block unwanted light from escaping to areas adjacent to the lighting scheme, but best practice would be to not generate glare in the first instance. Ensuring that any light is focused towards the task areas without having to incline the light source will further reduce the possibilities of creating glare.

Type

Day Eav lux

Night Emin lux

Eav lux

Emin lux

Subways Open

Enclosed

350

150

100

Footbridges Open

Enclosed

350

150

100

Stairways / Ramps Open

Enclosed

350

150

100

NB. Extract taken from BS 5489-1:2003 Table 4

The Garda LED modules provide a genuine asymmetric light output which allows a wide area of footpath or stairway to be illuminated with zero inclination to the LED module. This will provide a glare free lighting solution without having to inline the LED module and expose the bright light emitted from the product.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Illuminated Bollards 223

Illuminated Bollards Trebem

Lago

Pharola

Pharola-Max

224 – 225

226 – 227

228 – 229

230 – 231

The contrasting styles of our contemporary LED bollards and timeless classics demonstrates the wide scope of this range of illuminated bollards. They offer a solution on their own or in conjunction with our wide range of complementary column-mounted or in-ground products, to define pedestrian entrances and paths or highlight walkways through urban areas. Made to withstand the test of time, these bollards are manufactured from vandal resistant, durable materials with LED options, to ensure longevity of the installation. Designed to complement their surroundings by day they provide good optical control by night.

Precise, timeless engineering Silka-Max Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

Silka

Silka-Max

Rona

Nexus & Riga

232 – 235

236 – 237

238 – 239

240 – 241

Polar & Vector

Cannon & Eton

242 – 243

244 – 245

Using LEDs in classic designs demonstrates the wide scope of this range

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

224 Illuminated Bollards

Trebem

Illuminated Bollards 225

Product Codes Example 1. Model TRE

TRE

2. Height

Options

Materials

Trebem 1000mm and 2200mm installation heights Twin LED option lighting both ways

Body: Steel

Trebem

Cover Plate: Steel Finish: Two-pack acrylic wet spray paint

IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

010

1000mm

022

2200mm

Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply

Root

Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting

Supplied with 1 metre of flexible cable for ease of installation

Flange Plate

Light source: 3 x 3W LEDs Warm white 3000K Neutral white 4500K Cool white 6000K

Base compartment: Cable access compartment with space for electrical termination available on request

010

3. Mounting R

4. Light Source WW

Warm White LED – 3000K

Neutral White LED – 4500K

Cool White LED – 6000K

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below DB

DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

Example Code = TRE 010 R WW DB

Colours: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White Optical control: Performance LED Array

Installation and Maintenance

• Robust steel i-beam with LED array • Base compartment option to allow installation of electrical cut out if required • Two mounting height options

Optional accessories IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Optical Distribution

Other: Double sided arrangement available for two-way illumination

2250mm

2000mm

1750mm

1500mm

1250mm

1000mm

750mm

500mm

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

RAL 9006

RAL 9007

DB 703

250mm

Dimensions mm This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

260

1000

150

260

2200

150

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

226 Illuminated Bollards

Lago

Illuminated Bollards 227

Product Codes Example 1. Model LAG

LAG

2. Height

Options

Materials

Lago 1000mm and 1300mm installation heights

Body: Aluminium

Mounting: Flange plate only

010

1000mm

013

1300mm

Glazing: Polycarbonate lens LED module

RAL 7016 Antracite Grey

Golden Oak

Gear, switching and control: Low voltage IP67 Driver

010

3. Colour

Example Code = LAG 010 20

Light source: 4 LEDs – 9W total Neutral white – 4500K Colours: RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey Golden Oak Optical control: Performance LED Array

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Lago

Glazing: Polycarbonate lens

IP66 | IK10 | CLASS II

Seals: Silicone rubber

Installation and Maintenance Product is supplied with single outgoing flexible cable for easy installation

• Contemporary design with slim vertical elements supporting the light source • 1000mm and 1300mm versions available

Optional accessories

• Low profile head

IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

• Low energy consumption

Optical Distribution

2000mm

1750mm

1500mm

1250mm

1000mm

750mm

500mm Wood effect front panel 250mm

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

200

1000

130

200

1300

130

8.5

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

228 Illuminated Bollards

Pharola

Illuminated Bollards 229

Product Codes Example 1. Model PHA

PHA

2. Height 060

600mm Bollard

010

1000mm Bollard

022

2200mm Light Post

Wall Mount Root

Flange Plate

Materials

Bollards 600mm 1000mm 2200mm

Head: Corrosion protected aluminium

Wall mounted version

See pages 200 – 201 for details

010

3. Mounting R

Options

4. Light Source

Mounting: Integral root Flange plate First-fix root system for simple steel wire armour cable termination available on request Wall mounted

Glazing: Diffused acrylic

DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage LED driver

With 180°back shield

Without 180°back shield

Neutral White LED – 4100K

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below DB 6. Back Shield

Example Code = PHA 010 R NW DB B

Light source: 5 x 2.4W LED Neutral white – 4100K

Pharola

Glazing: Acrylic Body: Galvanised steel

IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

• Slim, elegant, styling

Installation and Maintenance

• Uniform 360º lighting distribution

Product is supplied with single outgoing flexible cable for easy installation

• Three bollard heights and complimentary wall mounted versions (see pages 200 – 201) for cohesive project design

Optional accessories

• Excellent thermal management of LEDs for high lumen output and long LED life

IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01

Optical Distribution

Colours: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White

2500mm

Optical control: Performance LED Array Other: 180º light shield Custom heights available to order Body in stainless steel or aluminium to order

2250mm

2000mm

1750mm

1500mm

1250mm

1000mm

Pharola-Wall Angled

750mm

500mm

Dimensions mm

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

RAL 9006

RAL 9007

DB 703

250mm

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Pharola-Wall Flat

Weight kg

600

300

1000

500

2200

500

Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

230 Illuminated Bollards

Pharola-Max

Illuminated Bollards 231

Product Codes Example 1. Model PM1

150mm Head PM2

PM1

250mm Head

2. Height 009

900mm Bollard

030

Materials

PM1 Head height: 150mm Overall height: 900mm/3000mm

Head: Corrosion protected aluminium

PM2 Head height: 250mm Overall height: 1000mm/3000mm

010

1000mm Bollard

030

3000mm Bollard

Mounting: Integral root (standard) Flange plate Glazing: Diffused polycarbonate

010

3. Mounting R

Root

Flange Plate

Warm White LED – 3000K

Neutral White LED – 4100K

Gear, switching and control: Integral LED driver

4. Light Source NW

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 27

Options

RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey

With 180°back shield

Without 180°back shield

6. Back Shield

Example Code = PM1 010 R NW 27 B

Pharola-Max

Glazing: Polycarbonate Post: Galvanised steel

IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

Installation and Maintenance

• Increased diameter version of the Pharola

Cabling and product access through door

• Complete with door for cable termination access • Choice of two head options

Optical Distribution

Light source: 12 x 2.4W LEDs Warm White – 3000K Neutral White – 4100K Colours: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White Optical control: Performance LED Array Other: 180º light shield Custom heights available to order

2250mm

2000mm

1750mm

1500mm

1250mm

1000mm

750mm

500mm

PM2

PM1

250mm

RAL 9016

RAL 9005

RAL 9006

RAL 9007

DB 703

Dimensions mm

PM1 This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

PM2

Weight kg

152

900

150

300

152

3000

150

300

152

1000

250

300

152

3000

250

300

PM2

Pharola-Max PM2

PM1

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

232 Illuminated Bollards

Silka

Illuminated Bollards 233

Product Codes Example 1. Model SI

2. Height 1

2.0m 2

2.7m

3.5m 4

4.0m

3. Mounting R

Root

Flange

4. Light Source 224L

2 x 24W PL-L 236L

224L

2 x 36W PL-L 255L

2 x 55W PL-L

WLED

White LED Array

RLED

RGB LED Array

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 26

RAL 9006 Aluminium

Example Code = SI 1 R 224L 26

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Silka 1 2.0m Silka 2 2.7m Silka 3 3.5m Silka 4 4.0m Custom heights available to order

Simple wiring via a mains connection within the base of the luminaire head

Silka

Optional accessories Bolt-on root SIL-R (all versions)

IP55 | IK10 | CLASS I • Robust and corrosion resistant construction • Available in brushed stainless steel or painted galvanised steel

Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting Bolt-on root also available

• Choice of lamps or LEDs including RGB

Glazing: Opal polycarbonate Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Light source: LED: White or RGB 2 x 24W, 2 x 36W, 2 x 54W PL-L RGB colour change available on request

Model

All versions

240mm 800mm 114mm

Optical Distribution

Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Stainless steel (brushed) Other RAL colours available on request

Materials

5.0m

Glazing tube: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate glazing

4.5m

Body: Galvanised steel (standard) Stainless steel Finish: Polyester powder coated (standard) Brushed and passivated (stainless steel only)

4.0m

3.5m

Bolt on root: Galvanised steel 3.0m

2.5m

2.0m

1.5m

1.0m

Silka 4

Silka 3

Silka 2

Silka 1

0.5m

Dimensions mm

Stainless Steel

RAL 9006

RAL 9007

ØC

A Silka 1 This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

2000 450

Weight kg C 170

with flange

with root

Silka 2

2700 560

170

Silka 3

3500 560

170

Silka 4

4000 660

170

Bengeworth School, Evesham

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

234 Illuminated Bollards

Silka Bengeworth School, Evesham

Illuminated Bollards 235

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

236 Illuminated Bollards

Silka-Max

Illuminated Bollards 237

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Silka-Max 4 4.0m

Simple wiring via a mains connection within the base of the luminaire head

SIM

Silka-Max 5 5.0m Custom heights available to order

1. Model SIM

SIM

2. Height 4

4.0m

Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting Bolt-on root also available

5.0m

Root

Flange Plate

Glazing: Opal polycarbonate Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear

3. Mounting R

4. Light Source 236T

236T

2 x 36W T8

WLED

White LED Array

RLED

RGB LED Array

236T

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 26

RAL 9006 Aluminium

Example Code = SIM 4 R 236T 26

5.0m

Silka-Max

Optional accessories Bolt-on root SIL4-R (Silka-Max 4) SIL5-R (Silka-Max 5)

IP55 | IK10 | CLASS I • Increased height version of Silka • Available in brushed stainless steel or painted galvanised steel • Available in stainless steel, aluminium or galvanised steel • Choice of lamps or LEDs including RGB

Light source: LED: white or RGB 2 x 36W T8 RGB colour change available on request

Model

Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Stainless steel (brushed) Other RAL colours available on request

Silka-Max 4 240mm 800mm

C 114mm

Silka-Max 5 240mm 1200mm 114mm

Optical Distribution

Materials Glazing tube: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate glazing

4.5m

Body: Galvanised steel (standard) Stainless steel

4.0m

Finish: Polyester powder coated (standard) Brushed and passivated (stainless steel only)

3.5m

Bolt on root: Galvanised steel 3.0m

2.5m

2.0m

1.5m

0.5m

Silka-Max 5

Silka-Max 4

1.0m

Stainless Steel

RAL 9006

RAL 9007

ØC

Dimensions mm A This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg C

with flange with root

Silka-Max 4 4000 1280

170

Silka-Max 5 5000 1280

170

Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

238 Illuminated Bollards

Rona

Illuminated Bollards 239

Product Codes Example 1. Model RON

RON

2. Height 1

4.5m

Root

Flange

070C

70W CDM-T

150C

150W CDM-T

070C

Light source: 70W, 150W CDM-T 35W CDM-R optional spotlight

5. Optional Spot Light Y

35W CDM-T Spot Light

No Spot Light

6 . Colour – for alternative colours see below 26

RAL 9006 Aluminium

Example Code = RON 2 R 070C Y 26

Simple wiring via a mains connection within the base of the luminaire head

Glazing: Clear Polycarbonate

4. Light Source

Rona 1 4.0m Rona 2 4.5m

3. Mounting R

Installation and Maintenance

Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting Bolt-on root also available

4.0m 2

Options

Optional accessories Bolt-on root RON-R (all versions)

Rona IP55 | IK10 | CLASS I • Clear glazing • Robust construction • Area lighting main optic with optional spot light for highlighting architectural features

Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Other RAL colours available on request

Materials Body: Aluminium Finish: Polyester powder coated

Model

All versions

300mm

1000mm 114mm

Optical Distribution

Bolt-on root: Galvanised steel 5.0m

4.5m

4.0m

3.5m

3.0m

2.5m

2.0m

1.5m

ØA

1.0m

Dimensions mm

RAL 9006

RAL 9007

0.5m

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Weight kg

200

4000

800

46•

200

4500

1300

52•

•add 5kg for additional spot light

Optional spot light

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

240 Illuminated Bollards

Nexus & Riga

Illuminated Bollards 241

Product Codes Nexus

Example

Nexus or Riga Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Head: Corrosion protected cast aluminium

RIB

NEB

Mounting: Integral root (standard) Flange plate

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate

2. Optic C

Cone Optic™

Anodised Louvre

3. Control Gear E

Electronic Gear: available in all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source 050S

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

L130

Warm White LED – 3000K

L141

Neutral White LED – 4100K

045W

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10

Materials

Riga

1. Model NEB

Options

RAL 9005 Black

10 B

6. Back Shield B

With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps)

Without 180°back shield

Example Code = NEB C E 045W 10 B

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate Light source: 12 x 2.4W LEDs Warm White – 3000K Neutral White – 4100K 45W, 60W CosmoPolis 50W, 70W StreetWise 50, 70W SON-T+ 35, 70W CDM-T 70W CDO-TT 42W PL-T Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green

Nexus & Riga

Cone Optic: Anodised aluminium

IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

Body: Galvanised steel tube Seals: Silicone rubber

• Styled to complement the Classic range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 90 & 256)

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Installation and Maintenance

• Available in lamped or LED versions • Cone Optic™ allows for extended spacings of bollards with excellent uniformity

Access via Allen screws

Optical Distributions

• Improved vandal resistance with tough polycarbonate glazing • Optional specular back shield projects unwanted light forwards

Cone Optic™

Cone Optic™ with 180º Back shield

Optical control: LED Array Cone Optic™ reflector (standard) Anodised aluminium louvre Other: Electronic gear, some models Specular back shield (180º cut-off) up to 50W lamp maximum

2000mm

1750mm

1500mm

1250mm

1000mm

750mm

Nexus

Riga

ØB

500mm

ØB

250mm

ØC

Nexus Dimensions mm

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 9007

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

RAL 9005

ØC

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Riga

Nexus

Weight kg

Nexus

1000

186

152

300

Riga

1000

197

152

300

Riga Windsor & Maidenhead Town Hall

Riga

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

242 Illuminated Bollards

Polar & Vector

Illuminated Bollards 243

Product Codes Polar

Example

Polar or Vector Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Head: Corrosion protected cast aluminium

VEB

Mounting: Integral root (standard) Flange plate

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate

2. Optic C

Cone Optic™

Anodised Louvre

3. Control Gear E

Electronic Gear: available in all light sources

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source 050S

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

045W

45W CosmoPolis

060W

60W CosmoPolis

L130

Warm White LED – 3000K

L141

Neutral White LED – 4100K

L130

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 10

Materials

Vector

1. Model POB

Options

RAL 9005 Black

With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps)

Without 180°back shield

6. Back Shield

Example Code = VEB C E L130 10 N

Polar & Vector

Cone Optic: Anodised aluminium Body: Galvanised steel tube Seals: Silicone rubber Finish: Polyester powder coated

IP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

Installation and Maintenance

• Styled to complement the Classic range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 90 & 256)

Access via Allen screws

Optical Distributions

• Available in lamped or LED versions • Cone Optic™ allows for extended spacings of bollards with excellent uniformity

Cone Optic™

• Improved vandal resistance with tough polycarbonate glazing

Cone Optic™ with 180º Back shield

• Optional specular back shield projects unwanted light forwards

Optical control: LED Array Cone Optic™ reflector (standard) Anodised aluminium louvre Other: Electronic gear, some models Specular back shield (180º cut-off) up to 50W lamp maximum

2250mm

2000mm

1750mm

1500mm

1250mm

1000mm

750mm

Polar

Vector

ØB

250mm

500mm

ØC

Polar Dimensions mm

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 9007

PAN 7621

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

RAL 9005

ØC

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Vector

Polar

Vector

Weight kg

Polar

1000

186

152

300

Vector

1000

186

152

300

Polar Stanhope Road, St Albans

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

244 Illuminated Bollards

Cannon & Eton

Illuminated Bollards 245

Product Codes Cannon

Eton

Example

1. Model CAN

ETN C

Cone Optic™

Louvre

Electronic Gear: available

Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T

042P

42W PL-T

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate

RAL 6005 Light Moss Green

Optical control: Cone Optic™ (standard) Polished aluminium louvre set

042P

6. Back Shield B

With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps)

Without 180°back shield

Example Code = CAN C E 042P 50 N

Light source: 50W, 70W Streetwise 50W, 70W SON-T+ 35W, 70W CDM-T 70W CDO-TT 42W PL-T Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red

5. Colour – for alternative colours see below 50

Body: Cast iron

4. Light Source 050S

Cannon or Eton Maximum lamp wattage: 70W Mounting: Integral 300mm root

3. Control Gear M

Materials

CAN

2. Optic C

Options

Cannon & Eton

Finish: Two pack acrylic

Installation and Maintenance Access via Allen screws Lockable base compartment available for cable termination

IP55 | IK07 | CLASS I

Optical Distribution Cone Optic™

• Styled to complement the Traditional range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 106 & 256)

Back shield

• Cone Optic™ allows for extended spacings of bollards with excellent uniformity

Louvre

• Optional specular back shield projects unwanted light forwards • Lockable base compartment available for cable termination

Other: Specular back shield (180° cut off), up to 50W lamp maximum Details painted Gold

2250mm

2000mm

1750mm

1500mm

1250mm

1000mm

750mm

Cannon

Eton

ØB

500mm

ØC D

250mm

RAL 3005

RAL 6005

RAL 5003

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

RAL 9005

Cannon Cannon Dimensions mm

A This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Eton

Weight kg

Cannon 1005

120

210

300

1000

160

200

300

Eton

Cannon Belfry Hotel, Cambridge

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Floodlighting 247

Floodlighting Colada LED

Colada

Tizona

248 – 249

250 – 251

Sabre 252 – 253

Floodlight Brackets 254 – 255

Flexibility built in Tizona Ashkelon Train Station, Israel

A comprehensive aesthetically pleasing range of functional floodlights providing performance illumination for a variety of applications: from accurate feature lighting of building façades, through road lighting, to floodlighting large areas such as sports pitches. A variety of light sources and distributions provide additional flexibility of scheme design, including asymmetric, narrow beam and our patented Diamond Optic®. Complementary brackets, with distinct styling, match the floodlights and offer column or wall mounting options. Baffles reduce unwanted light spill to surrounding areas.

A variety of light sources and distributions provides additional flexibility of scheme design

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

248 Floodlighting

Product Codes

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Example

Colada 1 Maximum LED wattage: 39.6W

Lamp access via 4 captive socket head screws

CO2

Colada 2 Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Cable entry via PG11 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable (Colada 1)

Mounting: Bracket mounted

Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable (Colada 2)

Glazing: Toughened glass

Optional Accessories

1. Model CO1

CO2

2. Reflector A

Asymmetric

Narrow Beam

3. Light Source 070TD

70W CDM-TD/SON-TD

150TD

150W CDM-TD/SON-TD 250TD

250W HQI-TS

150S

150W SON-T+/CDO-TT

250S

250W SON-T+/CDO-TT

400S

400W SON-T+/HQI-BT/D

Light source: See product codes

Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Narrow beam

Warm White LED 3000K

Cool White LED 6000K

• Choice of asymmetric or narrow beam reflectors to provide alternative lighting effects • Available in two sizes: 70W – 150W and 150W – 400W • Now available in LED • Stylish 500mm projection wall and column brackets available

Double post top bracket Colada 2 CO2-DB

Other: A full range of wall and column brackets is available

Example Code = CO2 A 150S

IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

Single post top bracket Colada 2 CO2-SB

Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium

150S

Colada

See pages 254 – 255 for details

Anti-dazzle external louvre Colada 1 CO1-EL Colada 2 CO2-EL

Materials Body: Die cast aluminium Mounting: Steel bracket finished RAL 9006 Aluminium

Light hood Colada 1 CO1-LH Colada 2 CO2-LH

Access: Captive socket head screws Seals: Silicone rubber

Optical Distribution Colada 1 Asymmetric

72°

15°-20° 32°-36° 15°-20°

30°-36°

76-80°

32°-36°

30°-36° 62°

76-80° 72° 72°

HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD

70W 150W

72°

62° 62°

62° 8°-12°

72°

62°

6°

39.6W LED

72°

ax Imax

ax ax Im

15°-20° 140° 8°-12° 32°-36° 15°-20° 30°-36° 32°-36° 30°-36° 72° 62° 15°-20° 15°-20° 74-80° 36°-50° 32°-36° 32°-36° 76-80° 30°-36° 30°-36°

140° 76-80° 76-80° 76-80°

ax 15°-20° 32°-36° 38°-40° 30°-36° 12-16° 8°-12° 62° 17°-21° 8°-12°

76-80°

ax Imax

HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD

70W 150W

Colada 1 Narrow beam

Colada

6°

62°

8°-12°

36°-50°

72° 84-92°

74-80°

8°-12°

15°-20° 8°-12° 32°-36°

39.6W LED

76-80°

ax Im

30°-36°

10°-12°

12°

74-80°

84-92° 74-80° 74-80°

84-92°

74-80°

12° 36°-50° 38°-40° 12-16° 17°-21° 36°-50° 8°-12° 36°-50° 36°-50°

38°-40° 12-16° 38°-40°

84-92° 74-80°

17°-21° 36°-50°

12-16° 38°-40° 17°-21°10°-12° 12-16° 10°-12° 17°-21° 38°-40° 12-16° 38°-40° 17°-21° ax Im

a Im

SON-T+/CDO-TT SON-T+/CDO-TT SON-T+/HQI-BT/D

150W 250W 400W

38°-40° 12-16° 17°-21° 36°-50°

Colada 2 Asymmetric

Colada

Floodlighting 249

Colada LED

84-92°

12-16° 17°-21°10°-12°

84-92° 84-92°

Colada 2 Narrow beam 250W

HQI-TS

Dimensions mm

10°-12° 10°-12°

Windage

Colada 1

268

340

105

5.1

0.08m2

Colada 2

410

540

153

13.2

0.18m2

10°-12°

Weight kg

Bergamo, Italy

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

250 Floodlighting

Product Codes Asymmetric

Narrow Beam

Diamond Optic®

TIZ N

TIZ D

Tizona

Example

1. Model TIZ A

TIZ D

2. Light Source 070S

050S

50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

042P

42W PL-T

057P

57W PL-T

070TD

70W CDM-TD/SON-TD

150TD

150W CDM-TD/SONTD 035C

35W CDM-T

070C

70W CDM-T

150C

150W CDM-T

5/35

10/10

31/35

5/25

Options

Installation and Maintenance

Tizona Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Lamp access via 4 captive socket head screws

Mounting: Bracket mounted

Cable entry via M16 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable

Glazing: Toughened glass

Optional Accessories

Light source: See product codes

Optical control: Diamond Optic® Asymmetric reflector Narrow beam 150C

• Range of reflectors including Diamond Optic® to suit many applications including road lighting

Double post top bracket TIZ-DB Anti-dazzle external louvre TIZ-EL

See pages 254 – 255 for details

Materials Body: Die cast aluminium

Example Code = TIZ D 150C B

• Choice of mounting options

• Timed ignitor fitted as standard

Other: A full range of wall and column brackets is available

IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

Single post top bracket TIZ-SB

Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium

3. Diamond Optic® Setting

Tizona

Light hood TIZ-LH

Mounting: Steel bracket finished RAL 9006 Aluminium Seals: Silicone rubber

Optical Distribution Tizona Diamond Optic®

A 5/35

B 10/10

50W SON-T+/StreetWise 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 35W, 70W, 150W CDM-T 15-45° 15-45° 8°-52° 8°-52°

C 31/35

D 5/25 56-94° 56-94°

8°-26° 8°-26°

15-45° 8°-52°

15° 28 15° See 8°-26° pages – 31 for details 27°-52° 27°-52° ax

56-94°

15° 17°-25°

27°-52° 74-76°

15°-20° 15-45° 8°-52° 32°-36° 15-45° 30°-36° 8°-52° 76-80° 45° 45° 8°-26° 10°-12°10°-12° 8°-26° I Im ma ax 45° x 12°-22°12°-22° 10°-12° ax

12°-22°

ax x Im Ima

SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise PL-T CDM-TD/SON-TD

74-76° 74-76°

72°

Tizona Asymmetric 70W 42W, 57W 70W, 150W

17°-25°17°-25° 62°

Tizona

Floodlighting 251

56-94° 56-94° 60-68° 60-68°

60-68°

8°-12°

Tizona Narrow Beam 70W, 150W

CDM-T

15°

27°-52° 15° 27°-52° 6°

36°-50°

45° 45° 10°-12°

74-76° 74-76° 6°

17°-25° 6-7° 17°-25° 6-7° 6-7°

74-80°

6°

Dimensions mm A

310

385

160

Weight kg

Windage

8.0

0.1m2

Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

252 Floodlighting

Product Codes Narrow Beam

Example

SAB

1. Model SAB 2. Reflector A

Asymmetric N

Narrow Beam 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/HQI-T/D

400S

400W SON-T+/HQI-T/D

600S

600W SON-T+

001S

1000W SON-T

001H

1000W HPI-T 250SD

250W SON-TD

400SD

400W SON-TD

250HD

250W HQI-TS

400HD

400W HQI-TS

Installation and Maintenance

Sabre 250W – 400W: integral control gear

Ease of maintenance via large quick release latches

Sabre Plus 600W – 1000W: remote control gear Ignitor separately housed on luminaire

600W and 1000W options have remote control gear Gear box:

Mounting: Bracket mounted

3. Light Source 250S

Options

Glazing: Toughened glass Light source: See product codes Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Narrow beam

250SD

354

315

328

160

Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium

Double post top bracket To fit column shaft Ø60 – Ø76 SAB-DB

Mounting: Steel bracket finished 82-84º Aluminium RAL 9006 Access: Extruded aluminium latches 14 -15 º

Seals: Silicone rubber

Anti-dazzle external louvre SAB-EL

86-92º

Im 10 -1

2º

Light hood SAB-LH

ax 82-84º

24-30º 72°

14 -15 º

62°

82-84º 2º

24-30º

15°-20° 32°-36° 30°-36°5º

10 -1

SON-T+/CDO-TT/HQI-T/D SON-T+/HQI-T/D

8°-12°

5 º -41 18

76-80°

84-90º

250W 400W

18-24º 86-92º

72°

62°

Sabre Asymmetric

76-80°

30°-36°

ax Im

5º10-14º 415°-20° º32°-36° -42 22

Optical Distribution

Sabre

84-90º

º 55 º -41 18

• Tool-less maintenance via quick release latches

Single post top bracket To fit column shaft Ø60 – Ø76 SAB-SB

Materials

45º º -42 22

• Timed ignitor fitted as standard

Optional Accessories

See pages 254 – 255 for details

24-30º

IP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

• Range of light spill reducing accessories to suit most applications

Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable

Other: A full range of wall and column brackets is available

Example Code = SAB N 250SD

Sabre • Choice of reflectors including narrow beam for accurate illumination of architectural detail

195

Asymmetric

14 -15 º

22-26º

36°-50°

45º º 8°-12° -42 22 62°

74-80º 74-80°

72°

86-92º

84-92°

74-80°

10 -1

5º

2º

-3 2010-14º 36°-50°

76-80°

º -41 18 10°-12°

38°-40° 12-16° 17°-21°15°-20° 45º 32°-36° 30°-36° 8º

SON-T+ SON-T HPI-T

600W 1000W 1000W

14 -15 º

Sabre Plus Asymmetric

90-100º 18-24º

Sabre Plus

84-90º

8°-12° 38°-40° 12-16°

250W, 400W 250W, 400W

SON-TD HQI-TS

84-92°

Sabre Narrow Beam

17°-21°

Dimensions mm 36°-50° 10°-12° 22-26º

74-80°

38°-40° 12-16° 17°-21°

5º

84-92°

Weight kg

Windage

250 – 400W

293

663

485

0.2m2

600 – 1000W

293

663

556

11.2

0.2m2

74-80º 18-24º

10-14º

14 -15 º

Sabre

Floodlighting 253

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

254 Floodlighting

Floodlighting 255

Floodlight Brackets

Floodlight Brackets Product Codes Colada 1 Wall Bracket

Colada 1 Column Bracket

Colada 2 Wall Bracket

Colada 2 Column Bracket

Tizona Wall Bracket

Tizona Column Bracket

Sabre Wall Bracket

Sabre Column Bracket

CO1

CO2

TIZ

SAB

CB1

Colada 1, 2, Tizona & Sabre Brackets

Example

1. Model CO1

CB2-90

Double arm 90º

CB2-180

Double arm 180º

CB3-90

Three arm 90º

CB3-120

Three arm 120º

CB4

Four arm

Mounting: Wall bracket Column bracket: to fit 76mm Ø column top

Bracket: Wall bracket: steel Column bracket: aluminium/steel

Our range of wall and column brackets for the Colada, Colada LED, Tizona and Sabre floodlights offers a distinctive style that perfectly complements these luminaires

Other: Optional single arm and 3 arm at 120º also available on request

Single

CB2-180

Materials

Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium

CO1

2. Bracket WB

Options

CB2-180

Example Code = CO1 CB2-180

Sabre Column Brackets

Tizona Column Brackets

1200

1200 820 max

Colada/Colada LED Column Brackets

820 max

930

820 max

930

400

800

600

Colada 1: 1710

2500

1850

Colada 1: 1710

1850

2500

370

400

76 Ø

Sabre Wall Bracket

400

Colada/Colada LED Wall Brackets Colada 1: 805

Colada 1: 805 Colada 2: 1450

Colada 2: 1450

1200

Colada 2: 1450

1200

76 Ø

Tizona Wall Bracket

Colada 1: 805

Colada 1: 1710 Colada 2: 2640

Colada 2: 2640

76 Ø

800

600

930

400 400 Colada 1: 500

Colada 1: 500

600

800

Colada 2: 1000

600

800

Colada 1: 500 Colada 2: 1000

Colada 2: 1000

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Enriching lighting installations

257

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

We design all of our columns to sound engineering principles

Special Structures

Standard Columns

Special Columns

Painting Columns & Brackets

258 – 259

260 – 265

266 – 269

270 – 271

Projection

Columns Technical Details

Raise & Lower Columns

Column Enhancements

272 – 273

274 – 275

276 – 277

Pedestals 278

Providing a comprehensive lighting solution, DW Windsor offer a combined package of lanterns and columns. We design all of our columns according to sound engineering principles, taking into account structural weight and windage factors, with brackets and additional embellishments, including hanging baskets and banner arms, to add further interest. In addition to our standard products we also offer a bespoke column design service, with unique details or finishes for a truly special solution (see our Special Columns pages 266 – 269).

Projection

Column Brackets

Columns and brackets play an important role in creating a desirable day-time lighting scheme, with column height and bracket projection significant factors in establishing scale. By day, decorative brackets enhance the appearance of both traditional and contemporary lighting schemes and by night, illuminated finials can provide dramatic impact.

Finials

Wall Brackets

Feeder Pillars

284 – 285

286 – 287

288 – 289

279 – 283

EN40 EN 40 Column Standard 290 – 291

Sorento Westfield, Stratford City

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

258

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

259

Special Structures Images courtesy of Robe Lighting

There are times when a touch of extraordinary is required in a streetscape; a wow-factor or visual tour de force during daylight hours and when darkness falls, the scheme comes to life. Whatever your dream, with our technological expertise and design experience, DW Windsor are the lighting partners of choice for challenging projects and an ambitious vision. From vertical steel structures that have a strong industrial feel, making a greater statement than conventional columns ever could, or a suite of 9m high arches carrying a moving light and sound show, we have a wealth of experience in the design, manufacture and, where required, installation of extremely special projects such as these.

Bespoke conical, inclined and curved column carrying special luminaire and projector housing. Blackpool

Six bespoke 9m high arches, each spanning 18.7m and weighing more than 8 tonnes. Brilliance, Blackpool

For more information contact our customer service team: customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

260

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

261

Columns

Columns for Every Environment Lighting columns are available in a wide range of styles and sizes to suit just about any application. Whether itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s a 5m tubular column carrying a utility luminaire or a bespoke column carrying multiple light sources, unique brackets and a host of additional loads, at DW Windsor weâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re able to supply columns to meet your needs and vision. Our expert team are on hand to offer guidance and advice, ensuring your project meets both aesthetic requirement and perhaps more importantly, relevant standards: all of our lighting columns are manufactured using the latest techniques and machinery, designed and manufactured in strict accordance with EN 40.

Rio on 8m tapered column St. Martins Quarter, Worcester

Ely on 5m Chester column Ingress Park Dartford

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

262

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

263

Standard Columns

Standard Columns We have illustrated a selection of columns from our standard range. Variant and special versions can also be supplied to your particular requirements. The most common material used in the manufacture of lighting columns is steel. Tubular, tapered, embellished-tubular, hinged and curved columns are available in this material. Aluminium is increasing in popularity as a column material and poles are available as tubular, tapered, hinged and curved profiles in this light-weight substrate. Tapered stainless steel columns are available to special order and tubular versions are offered as well in a range of sizes.

Large Cardiff 10m, 8m

Tapered Steel/Tapered Aluminium 10m, 8m, 6m, 5m, 4m, various tapers

Amax 10m, 8m, 6m, 5m, 4m

Edinburgh 10m, 8m

Tubular Steel/Tubular Aluminium 12m, 10m, 8m

Cannon 10m, 8m, 6m, 5m, 4m

Large Chester 10m, 8m

Large Oxford 10m, 8m

Large Cambridge 10m, 8m

If you have the need for something special, please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk

For the relevant root and flange installation details for the columns illustrated on this page please see page 273

Milano LED on 5m tapered aluminium column Heron Tower, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Norwich 5m, 4m, 3.3m

Cambridge 6m, 5m, 4m

Tubular Steel/ Tubular Aluminium 6m, 5m, 4m

Cardiff 6m, 5m, 4m

Magna 6m, 5m, 4m

Chester 6m, 5m, 4m

Newcastle 6m, 5m, 4m

Tapered Steel/Tapered Aluminium 10m, 8m, 6m, 5m, 4m, various tapers

Volac 6m, 5m, 4m

265

Standard Columns

Oxford 6m, 5m, 4m

264

Please note our Cambridge, Oxford and Norwich column heights are to light source, actual column height does differ. Please refer to page 272 for further information. All Norwich, Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m mounting height have cast bases with flange plate as standard. Fabricated roots are available for these columns.

Please note that ladder bars are actually fitted at 90Âş to the door but are shown as above for illustrative purposes. For the relevant root and flange installation details for the columns illustrated please see page 273

Windsor LED on 4m Oxford column St Paulâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Churchyard, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Special Columns

267

Special Columns

On this and the following page we show a number of columns in different materials that may inspire you to choose something really distinctive for your next project. Our Special collection of timber and curved aluminium and steel columns are available in a range of shapes and profiles: tapered conical, parallel circular, square, even curved columns, the possibilities are almost endless. The sustainable choice; the timber used in the production of our wooden columns comes from forests that are PEFC certified (Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification) which promotes sustainable forest management. For each tree cut down for the manufacture of our columns, two more are planted. Please visit pefc.org for more information. Furthermore, any treatments and finishes applied to the timber are environmentally assured to ensure the products can be recycled at the end of their life. The load the column must withstand, your material preference and the project budget may influence which material we ultimately recommend to meet your requirements.

5m Parallel round wooden column with Strand B

4m Square taper wooden column with Windsor Street (with spigot plate)

4m Inverted taper wooden column with Milano straight arm

5m Tapered wooden column with Milano curved arm

Our timber columns are available in a range of colours:

Light Grey

Dark Grey

Dark Brown

Patina

Black

Antique Mahogany

Light Grey

Light Brown

Steel elements (powder coated)

Grey

Dark Grey

Wood finishes Dark Brown

6m Curved square wooden column with Evora

Please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk to discuss your requirements or for further information.

Brown

266

Manhattan on 5m tapered wooden column Chester Station

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Special Columns

6m Leaning column with Monaro

5m Curved top column with Evora

Please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk to discuss your requirements or for further information.

6m Large curved column with Evora

269

Special Columns

Our aluminium columns are made from 95% recycled material, are 100% recyclable and are carbon neutral through highly efficient manufacturing and a compensation scheme that funds a third-world sustainable project.

6m Leaning column with Monaro

268

Bespoke 11m steel column Bankside, London

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

Columns, Brackets Columns, Brackets

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

270 270 Pedestals & Feeder Pillars Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

271

Painting Columns & Brackets

At DW Windsor we pride ourselves on finishing columns and brackets to the highest possible standards. The combination of our skilled workforce, state-of-the-art painting facilities and many years of experience allow us to achieve a paint finish that is unsurpassed in the industry. Painting on site may be affected by the weather, temperature, humidity and inclusions in the paint before it dries (dust, insects etc). Any combination of these can cause problems with paint adhesion and thickness, giving a very poor finish and possible significant delays to the project.

The benefits of painting columns and brackets in a professional facility, where conditions are controlled and constant, are well known and more important today than ever. All of our steel columns and brackets are galvanised to EN 1461 to ensure an extremely robust, protective coating of the material both inside and out. As a result of its application process, surface irregularities and â&#x20AC;&#x153;spikesâ&#x20AC;? or drips of zinc may be present post-galvanising which our skilled engineers carefully address to remove or reduce without interfering with the integrity of the protection afforded by the galvanising.

The roots of our steel columns are finished in a glass-flake paint system which is both extremely hard and durable, ensuring the column root, the area most susceptible to corrosion, is given the best possible protection.

Ensuring quality to the last, all DW Windsor finished columns are protectively packaged prior to your delivery.

We offer two standard paint finishes in a wide range of colours: an acrylic system and a polysiloxane system. The former is a good balance between cost and robustness which will suit many applications, the polysiloxane is an incredibly hard wearing and tough paint that will retain its gloss level and colour for up to twenty-five years.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

272

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

273

Columns

Technical Details Specifying Light Source and Column Heights

Flange Plate Details

• Tubular columns are generally manufactured in steel or aluminium

Tubular Steel columns

Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m and all Norwich columns

For other materials contact us

When specifying a column, you only need to advise us of the height at which you require the light source for the desired lighting distribution and not the actual column height.

• All columns are available with root or flange plate

• Raising and lowering columns are available, including Oxford, plain and embellished columns See pages 274 – 275

We will ensure that the chosen column and/or bracket are accurately configured to position the light source where it needs to be. This means that in most cases the actual column height will be different to the chosen height of the light source.

• Tapered columns are available in aluminium as well as steel

• Columns with double door bases are available to order • All Newcastle and Norwich columns and Chester, Cardiff, Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m mounting height are available with or without ladder bars

250

Ø22

10m

Nominal Column Height

Dimensions (mm) A

139

260

200

22 x 38 283pcd

139

260

200

22 x 38 283pcd

139

260

200

22 x 38 283pcd

193

420

300

29 x 64 424pcd

10m

193

420

300

29 x 64 424pcd

• Column brackets are manufactured with a male spigot as standard for mounting onto plain top columns. Other spigot arrangements available on request

208

• Columns and brackets are hot dip galvanised to EN ISO 1461. Please note that galvanising is an extremely robust industrial protective coating which, as a result of its application process, may leave some visible surface irregularities • Columns can be supplied fully painted in any standard RAL colour and are offered in a choice of paint systems suited to standard applications or more aggressive environments such as industrial or coastal areas • Column roots (steel columns) are treated with a glass flake paint system. See pages 270 – 271 for full information on painting columns and brackets

Root Details Tubular Steel columns

Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m and all Norwich columns

For other materials contact us

Actual column height

Windsor Street shown on Oxford 4m column

Actual column height

Monaro LED on 5m tapered aluminium column

ØB

Ø139

Nominal Column Height

Dimensions (mm) A

800

139

1000

139

1200

193

10m

1500

193

800

350 150

800

350 150

350

Evora shown on Tubular Steel 10m column with Linear column bracket

150

Where underground obstructions cause a problem in positioning a column in the required location, bespoke, cranked and off-set roots are available which bolt to the column flange-plate

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

274

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Raise & Lower Columns

Raise & Lower Columns A Simple Solution to Difficult Access Raising & lowering columns enable maintenance to be carried out on luminaires used in areas where access to vehicles is not possible or allowable. They are available in a range of loading capacities and designs to suit the weight of the luminaire or luminaire and bracket being carried as well as a wide range of styles from plain tubular columns through tapered columns and to embellished columns in a style appropriate to the lantern being carried. We can even offer our cast-based Oxford column; the only raising and lowering column of this type on the market. We can offer essentially two types of hinged column: a base-hinged, winch operated version which has significant carrying capacity and a mid-hinged, rope operated version suitable for light loads and with the advantage that no winch-tool is required. Generally, steel is used for raise and lower columns but we can also offer beautiful aluminium columns with almost invisible hinge mechanisms.

Options

Materials

Mounting heights: Tubular & tapered: 5m, 6m & 8m Oxford: 4m, 5m & 6m Embellished columns: 5m & 6m

Column: Tubular & tapered: Galvanised steel

Embellished column styles: Amax Magna Volac Cannon Newcastle Chester Cardiff See pages 262 – 265 for illustrations of these columns

Embellished columns: Galvanised steel

Mounting: Tubular & tapered: Root Oxford: Flange plate Embellished columns: Root

275

Oxford & Cambridge: Ductile iron base with galvanised steel shaft Aluminium columns available on request

Mid-hinged columns

Finish: Tubular, tapered and embellished columns: Hot dip galvanised to EN ISO 1461 or to customer specification

• Simple operation. No winch required • Offset hinge means the column cannot tip accidentally • Column door allows access to base compartment without the need to lower the column

Oxford & Cambridge: To customer specification

• Tamper resistant external access to release the hinge mechanism • Oxford column – the only heritage-style hingedcolumn on the market

Colour: See Painting Columns & Brackets, pages 270 – 271 Other: Tubular & tapered: Flange plate available Oxford & Cambridge: Fabricated root available

Please contact our Customer Services team on: 01992 474600 for further information.

Embellished columns: Flange plate available

Technical Data Mid-hinged columns can carry a maximum head load of 20kg with a maximum wind area of 0.3m2

Mid-hinged Raise and Lower Columns 6m

Oxford hinged 5m column shown with Windsor Street luminaire

Newcastle hinged 5m column shown with Strand B luminaire

Mid-hinged 6m column shown with DW400 luminaire

Evora on mid-hinged columns Archer Road, Stevenage

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

276

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Column Enhancements

Column Enhancements Festive Decorations and Festoon Lighting We are able to supply lighting columns purpose designed to incorporate festive decorations, with integrated electrical sockets for power supply. Our columns can also be engineered to support catenary wires for festoon lighting.

Hanging Baskets

CCTV

Banners

Basket arms are available permanently fixed to the column or as clamp-on attachments for seasonal or periodic use. They can be supplied with minimal detail or styled to blend with the luminaire bracket, and are suitable for both tubular and tapered columns. Our clamp-on brackets enable baskets to be fitted to a range of tubular columns with ease. As with our clamp-on banner arms, these are available as single or double units and are manufactured from galvanised steel and malleable iron for strength and longevity.

We can supply heavy-duty lighting columns, both embellished and unkitted, suitable for camera mounting. We also offer specially adapted luminaires for housing CCTV cameras. Our luminaires offer high uniformity and low glare, making them exceptionally well suited to projects involving CCTV.

The arms may easily be removed when not required (during the winter months, for example) leaving the columns free of unnecessary clutter.

277

Our columns can be designed to carry a variety of custom-made or standard banner arms. Banners can be successfully incorporated into scheme designs to promote corporate branding, tourist attractions and high profile events.

Banners, festive decorations, baskets and CCTV

Our clamp-on banner brackets enable banners to be fitted with ease to a range of tubular columns. Available as single or double units, these subtly-styled products are manufactured from galvanised steel and malleable iron for strength and longevity.

Clamp-on Banner Arms

The flexibility of the design allows the arms to be removed when not required (during the winter months, for example) leaving the columns free of unnecessary clutter.

• Three sizes available, to fit 76mm, 114mm and 139mm Ø shafts

We can also supply banner-arms for tapered or curved columns or where large banners are required, using an alternative system to our clamp-on arms.

• Can be transferred to a different column if required (e.g. if the column has been damaged)

• Clamp-on, clean design and simple installation • Single and double arm versions available

• The length of the arms is customisable • Can be removed when not in use

• Supplied with fixing eyes as standard

Please contact Customer Services for more information on any of these products 01992 474600 or customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk

ØA

ØC Dimensions (mm) A

Customisable

76, 114 & 139

Rio with Gina bracket and banner arms on tapered column

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

278

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Pedestals

279

Column Brackets

For locations where the luminaire needs to be positioned close to the mounting surface, we offer a range of decorative cast and fabricated pedestals. Used to best effect when mounting luminaires along walls, on gateposts or plinths, pedestals are available in a range of sizes and designs to complement most products.

At DW Windsor we design, manufacture and paint our column and wall brackets in-house. This gives us complete control of the entire process and ensures the products, whether standard or bespoke, are made to the high standards expected of DW Windsor.

All pedestals have a mounting diameter of 76mm.

Column Brackets Our range of column brackets fully complement our luminaire styles. • Column brackets are manufactured with a male spigot as standard for mounting onto plain top columns. Other spigot arrangements available on request • Virtually all brackets are available for column and wall mounting • Column brackets are available in 1, 2, 3 or 4 arm configurations • Bracket projection dimensions are to the nearest 50mm

Projection Explained

Projection

The projection of a bracket is the horizontal distance between the centre of the column shaft or wall bracket mounting surface and the point at which the bracket enters the luminaire. As can be seen from the diagrams below, the distance from the centre of the column to the centre of the luminaire is quite different for side and top entry luminaires.

Ø22 250 Ø208 Ø18 201

250

Ø22

Ø165

Ø208 Ø18

Projection

Ø170

Ø12.5

Luminaire to Bracket Mounting

Ø10

Brackets are available in the following mounting sizes:

200

215

250

215

201

Ø12.5

Ø165

Ø22 250

Ø22

Projection

Side entry:

Norwich 150 1570mm Ø165

Ø165

York 200mm Ø150

Top entry:

Easy-fit™ (see page 100) provided as standard 1¼” or 1” BSP (dependent on product)

Pier 80mm

Ø170

215

Ø12.5 215

Ø12.5

Norwich 975mm

Ø10 200

201

Heights of pedestals

42mm Ø

Post top entry: 76mm Ø

Ø150

Ø170

Ø208 Ø18 201

Ø208 Ø18

Ø170

Ø10 00

Ø10

Cradle on Pier pedestal

Evora shown on 5m mid-hinged column and C1 column bracket Archers Road, Stevenage

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

280

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Column Brackets

Evora C1 Side Entry

Evora C8 Side Entry

Evora C9 Side Entry

Evora C10 Side Entry

Neva

Side Entry

Neva Post Top

Top Entry

Rio

Maximum 2 arms only Side Entry

Post Top Entry

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

670

850

1000

700

600, 850

600, 900

650

114

670

114

850

114

1000

114

700

600, 850

600, 900

650

114

600, 850

114

600, 900

114

600, 900

114

650

139

600, 850

139

600, 900

139

600, 900

Akord CD

Angled Entry: 30º or 45º

Chatham Top Entry

Tuscan

Gina

Side Entry

Linear (up to 150mm Projection)

Side Entry

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

600

1000

600

114

600

114

1500

114

1100

600, 850, 1100

114

600, 850, 1100

Akord DA Angled Entry: 30º

Akord SA Side Entry

Akord CC Top Entry

Akord CB

Angled Entry: 30º or 45º

Linear (over 150mm Projection) Side Entry

Linear

Top Entry

Post Top Entry

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

50, 150

400, 650

500, 750, 1000

50, 150

400, 650

500, 750, 1000

114

50, 150

114

400, 650, 900

114

750, 1000, 1250

114

750, 1000, 1250

139

50, 150

139

400, 650, 900

139

750, 1000, 1250

139

750, 1000, 1250

Linear Traditional Top Entry

Linear Traditional Braced Top Entry

Maya

Elegance

Side Entry

Post Top Entry

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

500 500•

750

1000

750

500, 750, 1000

600

550

114

750

114

1000

114

750

500, 750, 1000

600

550

114

750, 1000, 1250

114

750, 1000, 1250

114

600, 850

139

750, 1000, 1250

139

750, 1000, 1250

139

600, 850

114

281

•for Akord Cone C, 600 for Akord Cone A & B

Not available as multi-arm column bracket

Available as column bracket only

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

282

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Column Brackets

Genus

Side Entry

Genus Traditional

Top Entry

Genus

Teca

Post Top Entry

Teca

Side Entry

Teca Traditional

Top Entry

Arc Plain

Top Entry

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

600

650

400

500

650, 850

600

650

400

500

650, 850, 1000

114

600, 850

114

650, 900

114

650, 900

114

650, 900

114

400, 650

114

500, 750

114

500, 750

114

850, 1000, 1250

139

600, 850, 1100

139

650, 900

139

650, 900

139

400, 650

139

500, 750

139

500, 750

139

850, 1000, 1250

Inverted Genus

Side Entry

Inverted Genus

Top Entry

Inverted Genus Traditional Top Entry

Inverted Genus

Post Top Entry

Arc Scroll Top Entry

Arc Ornate Top Entry

Swan Neck Standard Top Entry

Swan Neck Iffley Top Entry

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

600

650

650, 850

600

650

650, 850, 1000

114

600, 850

114

650, 900

114

650, 900

114

650, 900

114

850, 1000, 1250

114

850, 1000, 1250

139

600, 850, 1100

139

650, 900

139

650, 900

139

850, 1000, 1250

139

850, 1000, 1250

Roco

Side Entry

283

Roco Traditional

Top Entry

Roco

Ornate

Post Top Entry

Hoop Traditional

Post Top Entry

Top Entry

Scroll Traditional Top Entry

Inverted Hoop Traditional Top Entry

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

Shaft Size (Ø)

Available Projection (mm)

900

1000

388

750, 1000

900

1000

418

750, 1000, 1250

114

900

114

1000

114

1000

114

1000

114

1000, 1250, 1500

114

1000, 1250, 1500

114

1000, 1250, 1500

139

900

139

1000

139

1000

139

1000

139

1000, 1250, 1500

139

1000, 1250, 1500

139

1000, 1250, 1500

Not available as multi-arm column bracket

Available as column bracket only

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

284

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

285

Finials • Spike or drum finials to enhance many standard bracket and column arrangements • Choice of illuminated or non-illuminated spike • Illuminated finial available in a choice of colours: blue, white or RGB

In order to provide you with more freedom in selecting the ideal bracket design for your scheme, we offer a number of optional finials.

Options Illuminated spike Illuminated drum Non-illuminated spike Light source (illuminated) 3 x 1W LED; White Blue RGB Gear: Integral driver

Materials Body: Illuminated spike finial: GRP Non-illuminated spike finial: Cast aluminium Drum finial: Acryl satine Dimensions: Illuminated spike finial: 1000mm tall x 76mm Ø Non-illuminated spike finial: 1000mm tall x 76mm Ø or 89mm Ø

Spike

Illuminated Drum

Illuminated Spike

Suitable for use with most column brackets

Drum finial: 100mm tall x 90mm Ø

Edge Lane, Liverpool

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

286

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Wall Brackets

Cast Wall Brackets

Wall Box Bracket™

Wall Channel Brackets

Cast brackets have the facility for a terminal block and are finished polyester powder coated as standard.

DW Windsor’s Wall Box Bracket™ is designed to bring practicality and flexibility to wall mounted luminaires. Its deep box design can accommodate a wide range of electrical components to enhance the function of the luminaire, whilst making installation and maintenance exceptionally easy.

The popular DW Windsor Wall Channel Bracket provides an attractive, low-profile and extremely stable solution where mounting a luminaire to a wall is required. Its twopart channel allows the rear element to be mechanically secured to the wall and electrical connection made before the more substantial front element and luminaire is attached, securely held by multiple fasteners.

Large Ornate 450

Ø76

The Wall Box Bracket™ can accommodate standard cut-outs and other electrical components such as control gear and time clocks. Batteries and electronic modules which may not be suited to mounting in the luminaire can also be housed, making the Wall Box eminently suited to luminaires used for emergency lighting. It is especially valuable where aesthetics or conservation criteria restrict the mounting of separate terminal boxes.

310

450

Ø76

Ø8.5

310

275

70 450

Ø8.5 1

B P

450

The Wall Channel Bracket is supplied galvanised and finished in any of our standard RAL colours. Ø12 A

310

B P 400

310

275

Ø8.5 70

This versatile bracket can be mounted on flat walls or, when specified, on external right-angle corners of buildings or onto circular surfaces such as telegraph poles.

Sealed to IP55, the interior of the Wall Box Bracket™ is accessed via tri-head screw fixings. A retaining strap prevents the front plate from swinging open too far, thus avoiding damage to the luminaire against the wall, whilst allowing full access to the box for maintenance.

450

310

275

Large Ornate Pendant

Constructed from steel, the Wall Box Bracket™ design is extremely versatile, with top and bottom cable entry facilities and compatibility with all bracket styles and entry types. We also offer alternative fixings for telegraph poles or wall corners. Galvanised and painted as standard, the Wall Box Bracket™ can be supplied in any of our standard RAL colours.

Cabling enters the bracket through a gland to the underside or via a rear cable-hole.

275

Ø8.5

70 Ø8.5

Ø76

450

Ø8.5 70

152

Ø12

/2” BSP

C A

Ø76

450

345

Large Plain Cast

313

287

Ø8.5

Medium

300

380

150

500

Large

400

640

210

760

313

345

300 438

Ø76 Maximum Internal depth 85mm

Ø8.5

Standard Unit

505

340

Long Unit•

605

440

445

400

438

Ø76

Cable entry may be effected from top or bottom and offers loop-in loop-out facility

•required for certain bracket styles

Ø8.5

445

400

70 Strand on Hoop Traditional wall channel bracket

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

288

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

289

Feeder Pillars

Feeder Pillars Product Codes Material & Finish Brushed stainless steel

Stainless steel painted RAL 9017

Galvanised steel painted RAL 9017

Juno Feeder pillars may be supplied complete with electrical equipment or empty (without backboard).

Juno 1 FP J1H B462

Non-standard versions (eg different heights or door sizes) are available to special order.

FP J1H B310

Please contact Customer Services with your requirements or enquiry on 01992 474600 or email customerservices@dwwindsor.co.uk

Juno 2 FP J2H B462

FP J2H B310

Kora Feeder Pillar

Juno 3 FP J3H B462

Juno Feeder Pillars

FP J3H B310

Juno 1

Juno 4 FP J4H B462

FP J4H B310

Juno 3

Kora

Ø170

Juno 5 FP J5H B462

Juno 2

Ø170

FP J5H B310

Ø220

150

Juno 6 FP J6H B462

FP J6H B310

1000

FP KOR B410

1000

FP KOR B462

1000

Kora

* For other finishes, replace 10 with the appropriate finish code

Juno Feeder Pillar St Martins Quarter, Worcester

Juno 3 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish

FP JU4 FR

Juno 4 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish

FP JU5 FR

Juno 5 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish

FP JU6 FR

Juno 6 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish

FP KOR FR

Kora feeder pillar fabricated root

Juno Supplied with hinged door(s) and flange plate

Juno: Stainless steel (in a brushed and passivated finish)

Kora Supplied with removable door and flange plate

Galvanised steel (finished in any standard RAL)

Colours: Stainless steel (brushed, grade 304) See standard colours below Other RAL colours available on request Other: Stainless steel grade 316 available on request Bolt-on roots are available, made from galvanised steel Available with electrical accessories. Please contact Customer Services for more information

Juno 4

Juno 6

Juno 5

Ø325 Ø325

Ø325

Kora: Stainless steel (grade 304)

600

Juno 2 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish

FP JU3 FR

Materials

Weight Juno 1 & 2: 20kg Juno 3: 31kg Juno 4 & 5: 64kg Juno 6: 81kg Kora: 16kg

400

FP JU2 FR

Options

1300

Juno 1 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish

Ø300

1000

FP JU1 FR

Ø240

1000

Accessories

Ø240

250

Ø420

Equipment shown in the feeder pillars is for illustration purposes only and not supplied as standard

DB 703

RAL 7037

RAL 7016

RAL 9005

RAL 9016

Ø420

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order. See inside front cover flap for further details.

dwwindsor.com | answers@dwwindsor.co.uk

290

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

291

EN 40 Column Standard

The requirements of lighting column design have always been complex and many have found it a challenge to fully understand them. To help specifiers gain a little understanding of EN 40, we have taken the opportunity to explain the main points of this standard and also offer a simple guide to the information required from the specifier to ensure lighting columns can be manufactured to a structurally sound design.

A Guide to Lighting Column Design Background and References

Site Data

BS EN 40: Parts 1 to 7 is the harmonised European standard for lighting columns which superseded BS 5649: Parts 1 to 9, the British Standard that was previously used. BS EN 40 is a more complicated design standard than BS 5649 and so BSI have produced a document – PD 6547: 2004 + A1:2009 ‘Guidance notes on the use of BS EN 40-3-1 and BS EN 40-3-3’ also termed the National Application Document (NAD). This gives guidance on the information the specifier is required to give to the manufacturer to allow a suitable lighting column to be designed. BD94/07, Design of Minor Structures, incorporates the provisions of BS EN 40 and BS EN 12899 and is required for reference in certain circumstances. It is recommended reading.

a) To design a column for a specific site: (when appropriate this will give the most economical column design). This information allows the highest wind pressure to be calculated which the column is likely to experience in a specified period – usually 25 years.

Information Required

Site altitude (Above sea level) – altitude affects the wind velocity (see above).

To design a lighting column to be structurally satisfactory requires the following information from the specifier:

PD 6547 Standard Road Sign Classifications Table 3 – Road sign class

• The equipment the column must carry

Sign class

Area of sign

Height to centre of sign

Sign shape

Offset

The acceptable performance of the column and its materials •

0.3m

2.5m

Square

0.3m

0.6m2

2.5m

Square

0.3m

• Site data to determine the maximum wind force the column is likely to experience

1.0m2

2.5m

Square

0.3m

Equipment

Notes: The most onerous orientation of the sign should be assumed. Unless stated the sign is assumed to have a mass of 5kg

The weight, windage area (i.e. the maximum area in the vertical plane) and position on the column – both height and offset – of all the equipment the column has to carry including luminaires, brackets, and for example signs, banners, hanging baskets, festive decorations etc.

BS EN 40-3-1: 2000 Terrain Categories

Standard road signs are classified as A, B and C, as indicated in the table reproduced from PD 6547.